JP4848541B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  According to the present invention, display results can be derived and displayed in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. A variable display device is provided, and a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value, and display results are derived in all of the plurality of variable display areas. The present invention relates to a slot machine in which one game is ended by being displayed and a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas.

  This type of slot machine is equipped with a game control board provided with a game control means for controlling the game, and the game control board is composed of switches and the like that allow the player to proceed with the game. Electronic components are connected by a cable through a relay board.

  The cables connecting these electronic components and the game control board are generally separable by releasing the connection at the connector in order to facilitate the assembling work and wiring work at the time of manufacturing the slot machine. In addition, since electronic components are common components that can be used without changing even when changing models, they are fixed to the main body of the slot machine, and the game control board is replaced when a failure or model change occurs. Therefore, the game control board can be easily removed from the main body and replaced by removing the cable side connector from the board side connector provided on the game control board to release the connection.

  However, when the slot machine is shipped from the manufacturer to the game store in such a state that the wiring connection between the game control board and the electronic component can be easily released by removing the connector, for example, in a game store, the board side connector is connected to the cable side. It is possible to easily connect the cable-side connector connected to an unauthorized tool such as a so-called driving tool to the board-side connector by removing the connector.

  For example, the driving tool is used to operate various switches provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board to input / output a signal that simulates a signal input / output to / from the game control board from the various electronic components. It is possible to automatically advance the game without playing. Therefore, for example, at a gaming store, etc., the regular connector connected to the board-side connector provided on the game control board is removed, and an unauthorized connector connected to the driving tool is connected instead. Is input / output to / from the game control board at an appropriate timing to automatically advance the game, for example, it is possible to easily set the state where the special role is won.

  Therefore, in the case where illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state where a special role is won using such an illegal driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop, There was a risk that the fairness of this would be impaired.

In this type of slot machine, in order to prevent replacement with a harness (cable) to which unauthorized parts are connected, the slot machine has a harness insertion hole formed with a smaller diameter than the harness side connector, The connector cover that covers the connection between the side connector and the harness side connector is detachably attached to the board case that houses the control board so that the connector cannot be pulled out unless the connector cover or board case is destroyed. After connecting the board-side connector and the harness-side connector to each other (for example, see Patent Document 1), the lid of the board case is attached so as not to be removable together with the connector, and the connector is pulled out unless the board case is destroyed. Proposals have been made that cannot be made (for example, see Patent Documents 2 and 3).
JP 2006-198091 A Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-230652 JP 2006-230653 A

  However, although a fraud prevention method focusing on the connector connection portion of the game control board has been proposed in the past, it is possible to prevent fraud by considering a configuration in which the electronic component and the game control board are connected via a relay board. There were no proposals for methods.

The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine capable of restricting release of connection between a board-side connector and a wiring- side connector at a game control board and a relay board. That is. A further object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that can effectively increase a player's expectation for a special winning combination accompanied by a transition to a special gaming state .

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) Variable display is possible by rotating a display band (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R). A variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel)
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
A plurality of types of gaming electronic parts including the derivation operation means for inputting or outputting signals relating to the progress of the game;
A game control board (game control board 40) mounted with a game control means (main control unit 41) that is electrically connected to the plurality of types of game electronic components and performs control to advance the game;
It is provided between the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and the game control board so as to be detachable by connection with a connector, and for electrically connecting the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and the game control board. Wiring and
A relay board (operation part relay board 110) that relays signal communication between the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and the game control board connected by the wiring and the connector ;
In the connection portion of the wiring connector between the game control board and the relay board, and in the connection portion of the wiring connector between the relay board and the plurality of types of gaming electronic components, each connector and disconnect regulating means for forming a connection release restricted state to limit understand dividing impossible without destroying the release restriction sites are involved in the connection, the
With
The game control means includes
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived (at the start of the game), a shift to a special winning state advantageous for the player and a prize winning (small role) with the addition of the gaming value is made. A pre-determining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of a winning including a special winning (big bonus) accompanying,
Derivation control means (reel stop control by the CPU 41a) for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated ;
Including
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has not yet been derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas, a derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is provided for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. One display result of a plurality of display results located within a predetermined range from the number of steps with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time of operation (area number assigned for each number of steps for one symbol) Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result (internal winning state) of the prior determination means from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify (stop position) (all at the start of reel rotation) Select the data creation table corresponding to the selected reel, and create stop control tables corresponding to all reels from the selected data creation table. Includes processing),
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control for deriving the display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area (control for stopping the reel at the stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table) Do,
The control pattern selection means includes
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the special winning (big bonus (1) / big bonus (2)) is allowed to occur, a specific variable display area among the plurality of variable display areas configure specific display result (chance th to at least one of the step number of the number of the step (region number 6～8,12～14,17 / area number 4～7,12～14,17) for Special prizes that identify “Replay Watermelon Bell” on No. 2-4, “Bell Red 7 Bell” on No. 8-10, and “Replay Blue 7 Watermelon” on No. 15-17 Special winning control pattern selection means for selecting a control pattern (reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to the item BB (1) RB / BB (2) in FIG. 12);
When the pre-determining means has determined that the first specific award winning (1 (1)) accompanying the awarding of the game value of a predetermined size among the award winnings is permitted. In addition, for the specific variable display area, the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is specified for the number of steps where the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range, Steps different from the number of steps (area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) for specifying the display results (display results including the “blue 7” symbol) constituting the first specific award winning (1 sheet (1)) The first specific prize-winning control pattern (FIG. 12) for specifying the specific display result with respect to at least one step number (region numbers 4 to 8, 10 to 14) of the number (region numbers 4 to 15). Stop control text corresponding to one (1) item A first specific grant winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a stop control) of the reel by Bull,
The pre-determining means allows the generation of a second specific award (1 (2)) accompanied by the awarding of the gaming value of the same size as the first specific award among the award winnings. When the determination is made, the second specific award is awarded for the number of steps in which the display result constituting the second specific award for the specific variable display area is within the predetermined range. The number of steps (region) that is different from the number of steps (region numbers 9 to 15) that identifies the display result to configure and identifies the display result (display result including the “red 7” symbol) that constitutes the second specific award winning The second specific award winning control pattern (FIG. 12) that specifies the specific display result with respect to at least one step number (area numbers 6-8, 17-21) of numbers 1-8, 16-21). Corresponds to one item (2) A second specific grant winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a stop control) of the reel by stopping control table,
When it is determined that any winnings are not permitted by the pre-determining means (losing), a display result other than the specific display result is specified from any of the step numbers. Non-winning control pattern selection means for selecting a non-winning control pattern (reel stop control by a stop control table corresponding to the item of loss in FIG. 12) ;
Including
In the display band constituting the specific variable display area, the display result constituting the first specific prize winning and the display result constituting the second specific prize winning are at intervals exceeding the predetermined range. Has been placed,
The first specific prize-winning control pattern includes the first specific prize-winning only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the second specific prize-winning is located within the predetermined range. The display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified for at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the second specific prize is located within the predetermined range. ,
In the second specific prize winning control pattern, the second specific prize winning control is performed only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. A display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified with respect to at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. ,
The special winning control pattern is the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific winning prize is positioned within the predetermined range, and the second specific winning prize control pattern specifies the specific display result The specific display result is specified for at least one of the number of steps to be performed, and the display result constituting the second specific award winning is the number of steps positioned within the predetermined range, and The first specific prize-winning control pattern specifies the specific display result with respect to at least one step number among the number of steps specifying the specific display result.

According to such a configuration , the connection portion of the wiring connector between the game control board and the relay board and the wiring connector between the relay board and the plurality of types of gaming electronic components. of the connecting portion, since that is a disconnect restricted state to limit understand dividing impossible without destroying the release restriction sites are involved in the connection in each of the connectors, the connector connecting portion of the three in the gaming control board and the relay board In any case, it becomes impossible to connect an unauthorized device such as a driving device without leaving a trace. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the driving tool as much as possible.

  Further, in a situation where display results have not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas, with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived. A control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the predetermining means is uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the derived display result, and control is performed to derive the display result in the corresponding variable display area. . That is, there is only one control pattern applied to the determination result of one pre-determining means, and it is not necessary to select any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns, and the display result of the variable display device is derived. It does not complicate the control when making it.

In addition, it may be determined that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted by the pre-determining means, or the decision that the occurrence of the first specific prize is allowed, and the first specific prize is generated. If no decision has been made or the decision to allow the generation of the second specific prize-winning has been made and the second specific prize-winning has not been generated, any of the prizes will be generated by the predetermining means. Since it is possible to derive a specific display result that is not derived when it is not permitted, a player who is allowed to generate a special prize by deriving a specific display result Can raise the sense of expectation.

In addition, in the state where it is not determined that the special winning is permitted, when the predetermining means does not allow any winning, that is, in the state that occupies most of the normal times, a specific display result is derived. In this case, it is possible to derive a specific display result by making a determination to allow the first specific prize or the second specific prize to be generated by the prior determination means. Even when the control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the predetermining means is uniquely selected, it is possible to derive a specific display result at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. .

In addition, when it is determined that the generation of the first specific prize winning is permitted, the operation timing of the derivation operation means for specifying the display result constituting the first specific prize winning, and the second Since the timing of operation of the derivation operation means for specifying the display result constituting the second specific award winning is different from each other when the determination that the occurrence of the specific award winning is permitted is made, It is impossible to operate the derivation operation means at a timing that does not miss both the first specific award and the second specific award winning, and the derivation operation means at a timing that does not miss either one When the above operation is performed, the other is surely missed. In this case, a specific display result can be derived. Therefore, even a highly skilled player who plays a game so as not to miss a special prize, the percentage of specific display results derived is never extremely low. It is possible to effectively increase the expectation for the occurrence of a transitional role for the other players.

  Further, to uniquely select the control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination unit is to always select the same control pattern when the determination result of the prior determination unit is the same, This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the determination results of the prior determination means are different.

The special winning control pattern selecting means (first specific winning / winning control pattern selecting means, second specific winning / winning control pattern selecting means) is any one of the variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived. Either a special winning control pattern (first specific prize winning control pattern, second specific prize winning control pattern) for only one variable display area, or a variable display area for which a display result has not yet been derived For selecting two or more variable display areas, a special prize control pattern (first specific prize-winning control pattern, second specific prize-winning control pattern), all variable display areas for which display results have not yet been derived It is one that selects the special winning control pattern (first specific grant winning control pattern, the second specific grant winning control pattern) Good.

Further, the non-winning control pattern selecting means is a special winning control pattern (first special winning winning control pattern selecting means, first special winning winning control pattern selecting means, second special winning winning control pattern selecting means). Any non-winning control pattern may be selected for the variable display area in which the specific giving winning control pattern and the second specified giving winning control pattern) are selected.

  Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. Good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of gaming states.

(2) Display results can be derived and displayed in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Equipped with a variable display device,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game is obtained by displaying the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine that can be awarded according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
A plurality of types of gaming electronic parts including the derivation operation means for inputting or outputting signals relating to the progress of the game;
A game control board mounted with a game control means that is electrically connected to the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and performs control to advance the game;
It is provided between the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and the game control board so as to be detachable by connection with a connector, and for electrically connecting the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and the game control board. Wiring and
A relay board that relays signal input and output between the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and the gaming control board connected by the wiring and the connector;
In the connection portion of the wiring connector between the game control board and the relay board, and in the connection portion of the wiring connector between the relay board and the plurality of types of gaming electronic components, each connector Connection release restriction means for forming a connection release restriction state that makes the release impossible unless the destruction restriction part related to the connection is destroyed,
With
The game control means includes
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, the generation of a prize including the prize winning accompanied by the addition of the gaming value and the special prize accompanying the transition to the special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. A pre-determining means for deciding whether to allow,
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
Including
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. For the variable display area, one display among a plurality of display results located within a predetermined range from the number of steps relative to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated A control pattern for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to a combination of the determination result of the pre-determining means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the result Including a selection means,
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control for deriving the display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection means includes
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed, at least one step number of the step numbers for a specific variable display region among the plurality of variable display regions Special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a special winning control pattern for specifying a specific display result,
The specific variable display when the pre-determining means determines that the generation of the first specific awarded prize accompanying the awarding of the game value of a predetermined size is permitted among the awarded prizes. A display result constituting the first specific prize winning is specified for the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range for the region, and the first specific prize winning is determined. The first specific grant that selects the first specific grant / control pattern that identifies the specific display result with respect to at least one of the number of steps different from the number of steps that identifies the display result that constitutes the display result Winning control pattern selection means,
The pre-determining means determines that the generation of the second specific award with the game value having the same size as the first specific award is permitted among the award winnings. Sometimes, the display result constituting the second specific prize winning is specified for the number of steps where the display result constituting the second specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range for the specific variable display area. The second specific award winning control pattern for specifying the specific display result with respect to at least one number of steps different from the number of steps specifying the display result constituting the second specific award winning. Second specific prize winning control pattern selection means for selecting
When it is determined by the pre-decision means that no winning is allowed, the display of the specific variable display area other than the specific display result from any of the number of steps. A non-winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a non-winning control pattern for specifying a result;
Including
In the display band constituting the specific variable display area, the display result constituting the first specific prize winning and the display result constituting the second specific prize winning are at intervals exceeding the predetermined range. Has been placed,
The first specific prize-winning control pattern includes the first specific prize-winning only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the second specific prize-winning is located within the predetermined range. The display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified for at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the second specific prize is located within the predetermined range. ,
In the second specific prize winning control pattern, the second specific prize winning control is performed only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. A display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified with respect to at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. ,
The special winning control pattern is the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific winning prize is positioned within the predetermined range, and the second specific winning prize control pattern specifies the specific display result The specific display result is specified for at least one of the number of steps to be performed, and the display result constituting the second specific award winning is the number of steps positioned within the predetermined range, and The first specific prize-winning control pattern specifies the specific display result with respect to at least one step number among the number of steps specifying the specific display result.
(3) a board case (board case 200) for housing the game control board;
A game control board side connector (board side connector 620a) and a wiring side connector (cable side connector 610a) that are provided separately from the board case and are attached to the board case. A restricting member (connector restricting member 500) that disables the connection with
Unless the predetermined removal restricting portion (sealing piece 232) is destroyed, the main body of the slot machine and the board case are connected so that the board case cannot be removed from the main body (mounting base 250) of the slot machine. Connecting means (one-way screw)
By connecting the substrate case and the main body of the slot machine by the connecting means, a restricting member removal restricting means for restricting removal of the restricting member from the substrate case is configured.

According to such a configuration, the wiring- side connector is connected to the board-side connector with the attachment-side member being attached to the board case, and then the special member is attached to the attachment-side member and integrated to form the regulating member. By doing so, the connection between the board-side connector and the wiring- side connector of the board accommodated in the board case cannot be released, and in this state, the board case and the main body of the slot machine are coupled by the coupling means. The removal of the restriction member from the board case will be restricted, and the connection from the board side connector to the wiring side connector will not be done unless the removal restriction part is destroyed and the connection between the board case and the slot machine body is released. Cannot be released. In other words, the wiring- side connector cannot be separated from the board case without leaving a trace of destruction of the removal restricting portion, and an unauthorized instrument such as a driving instrument cannot be connected without leaving a trace. Also, when replacing the board together with the board case containing the board due to a failure or the like, if the removal restricting part is destroyed and the connection between the board case and the slot machine body is released, the restriction member is removed from the board case. Since the connection between the wiring- side connector and the board-side connector can be released, it is possible to separate the wiring- side connector from the board-side connector and remove it from the slot machine body together with the board-side connector without damaging the regulating member. It becomes. On the other hand, when replacing only the wiring , the connection between the board-side connector and the wiring- side connector can be released by destroying the separation restricting part and removing the special member, so that the board case is not wasted. , it is possible to remove the wiring to separate the wiring side connector from the board side connector from the board case.

(4) an attachment portion (locking hole portion 513) provided at a peripheral position of the connector on the game control board side;
When attached to the attachment portion, a special member (connector cover 520) that cannot be separated from the attachment portion unless the predetermined separation regulating portion (connection piece 522a) is destroyed,
By attaching the special member to the attachment portion (locking hole portion 513) in a state where the wiring side connector (cable side connector 610a) is connected to the game control board side connector (substrate side connector 620a), vent special member (connector cover 520) of the part (covering part 521) is the wiring side connector is disposed at a position overlapping the drawing direction of the (cable-side connector 610a), said wiring side of the connector (cable-side connector 610a) Restrict movement in the direction.

According to such a configuration, after connecting the wiring- side connector to the board-side connector, only the special member is attached to the mounting portion provided around the board-side connector, and a part of the special member is attached to the wiring- side connector. Since it overlaps in the pulling direction and the movement of the wiring side connector in the pulling direction is restricted, the assembling work can be reduced in restricting the release of the connection between the wiring side connector and the board side connector. Further, for example, even when the game control board is housed in the board case, it is only necessary to connect the wiring side connector to the board side connector in the state as it is, and then attach a special member to the mounting portion. In such a case, in restricting the release of the connection between the wiring side connector and the board side connector, the assembling work can be more effectively reduced. In addition, once the special member is attached to the attachment portion, it cannot be removed unless the separation restricting portion is destroyed, so that it is impossible to connect an illegal instrument such as a driving instrument without leaving a trace.

  Further, the mounting portion may be provided at a peripheral position of the board-side connector, may be provided on the game control board itself, or may be provided on a board case that accommodates the game control board. It may be provided, or may be provided on a member attached to the game control board or the board case.

(5) The slot machine is
Informing means for informing information related to the progress of the game (credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, payout display 13, liquid crystal display 51, etc.);
Specially determined data (having a storage area (work area) for storing data for performing operations of the game control means so as to be readable and writable, and indicating that it is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize) And a data storage means (RAM 41c) for storing the data stored in the storage area for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped,
The game control means includes
Wherein the determined is that to allow the generation of said special pay by prior determination means, when said special pay did not occur, and carryover means carried over the decision to permit the occurrence of the special pay after the next game ,
Game control state return processing means for executing a game control state return process (startup process) for returning the control state of the game control means based on the data stored in the data storage means when the game control means is activated; ,
Special decision data determination means for determining whether or not the special decision data (special role winning flag) is stored when the game control state return processing means returns the control state of the game control means;
When the special determination data determination means determines that the special determination data is stored, the notification means at start-up performs control for notifying that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted, using the notification means. Means (transmitting a power-on command indicating that the bonus has been won to the sub-control unit 91 and instructing a bonus confirmation notification).

According to such a configuration, it is necessary to turn off the power once in order to connect an illegal instrument such as a driving tool (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power), but forcibly connecting the connector. Even if you cancel and use a driving tool and set a special prize winning illegally, it will be easy to determine from the outside that you have won the special prize when the game control means is restarted. In addition, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state where a special winning prize is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop or the like. Moreover, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the dedicated notification means is used as the notification means.

(6) The slot machine has a storage area (work area) for storing data for the game control means to perform operations so as to be readable and writable, and is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize. Data storage means (RAM 41c) that stores special determination data (special role winning flag) indicating that the data is stored and retains data stored in the storage area for a predetermined period even when power supply to the slot machine is stopped. )
The game control means includes
Game control state return processing means for executing a game control state return process (startup process) for returning the control state of the game control means based on data stored in the data storage means when the game control means is activated. Including
In the slot machine, when the power supply is stopped, the game control board side connector (board side connector 620a / board side connector 621a / board side connector 622g) and the wiring connector (cable side connector 620a / cable) When the connection with the side connector 611a / cable side connector 612g) is released, the data initialization unit during power failure (the backup power supply VBB is connected to the cable 600a-) that initializes the data stored in the data storage unit (RAM 41c). The operation unit relay board 110-cable 601g-inserted medal sensor 41-cable 601g-operation unit relay board 110-cable 600a is supplied to the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40).

According to such a configuration, in order to connect an unauthorized device such as a driving device, it is necessary to release the connector. However, the connection of the connector is forcibly released and the driving device is used to illegally win a special prize. Even if you set the winning, the data storage means data will be initialized by disconnecting the connector in order to replace it with a regular connector, so that the special winning combination using the driving tool is won It is possible to prevent illegal sales such as providing the slot machine set to "" to a player at the start of business at a game shop.

A power failure that initializes the data held in the data storage means when the connection between the board side connector and the wiring side connector is released while the power supply to the slot machine is stopped. The time data initialization means is held in the data storage means when the connection between the board side connector and the wiring side connector is released while the power supply to the slot machine is stopped due to the circuit structure. Monitoring to monitor whether or not the connection between the board side connector and the wiring side connector is released in a state where the power supply to the slot machine is stopped. Means is stored when the connection is released, and is stored in the data storage means when it is stored when the connection is released. The in and data control to may be configured to initialize.

In addition, when the connection between the board-side connector and the wiring- side connector is released, the connection between the board-side connector and the wiring- side connector is mechanically released and when the connection is electrically released. Either of them may be used.

  Further, when the data initialization means at the time of a power failure is a connection between at least one connector among the connections between the connectors on the wiring between the game electronic component and the game control board is released In addition, it is preferable to initialize the data held in the data storage means, and in this way, the slot machine set in the state in which the transition role is elected by using the driving tool is operated by the game store. Unauthorized sales such as providing to a player at the start or the like can be more effectively prevented.

(7) The game control means controls the gaming state to an advantageous state (RT) that is different from the special gaming state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the special gaming state ends. Including state control means (CPU 41a),
The advantageous state control means may be one of the first specific award winning (1 (1) winning combination) and the second specific award winning (1 (2) winning combination). When the event occurs, the advantageous state is terminated (when it is determined that one (1) or two (2) winning combination has been established, or when a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination is set. , Clear the RT flag).

  According to such a configuration, when it is desired to continue the advantageous state, the player is required to perform a pushing operation so as not to generate the first and second specific prizes in the advantageous state. Since there is technical intervention in the continuation of the advantageous state, it is possible to provide a highly interesting game.

(8) In the advantageous state, when the pre-determining means allows the generation of either one of the first specific prize and the second specific prize, the occurrence of any prize Allowable notification control (AT) for notifying the use of notification means (liquid crystal display 4, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53, 54, reel LED 55, etc.) different from the notification means or the notification means. Allowable notification control means (when the first or second winning combination is won in the internal lottery process, a winning notification flag corresponding to the internally winning winning combination is set, and a predetermined notification corresponding to the falling winning combination is set. The main control unit 41 performs control to output a control signal for
Permission information storage means (an AT game number counting counter is provided in a storage area of the RAM 41c) for storing permission information indicating permission of the permission notification control by the permission notification control means in accordance with establishment of a predetermined condition relating to the progress of the game. Including
The allowable paper known control means, on condition that the permission information is stored in the permission information storage means, whether or not the value of the allowable notification control is performed (AT game counting counter is 1 or more If the number is 1 or more, the counter value is decremented by 1 and an internal lottery process is performed. If the internal winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the incoming winning combination is notified)
The permission information storage means stores the permission information when the advantageous state is terminated by the occurrence of the first specific award or the second specific award when the permission information is stored. Is carried over to the next advantageous state (when the RT termination condition is satisfied, the RT flag is cleared, while the AT game number counting counter (falling-down prize avoidance game result) is maintained without being cleared. .)

  According to such a configuration, when the permission information is stored in the advantageous state, it is notified which of the first specific prize winning and the second specific prize winning is permitted. Therefore, a function that supports the pushing operation can be provided. Moreover, even if the first specific prize or the second special prize is generated in the state where the permission information is stored and the advantageous state ends, the permission information is carried over to the next advantageous state. Therefore, the permission information stored according to the establishment of the predetermined condition is not wasted.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below.
An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotated to a housing (not shown) whose front surface is open and a side end of the housing. It consists of a front door that is pivotally supported.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have “red 7 (black 7 in the figure)”, “blue 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “bell” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three continuous symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Further, on the front door, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. 1 bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the number of bets, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the gaming state within the range (the normal gaming state described later in this embodiment) In addition, the MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting 3 in RT (replay time) and 1 in the regular bonus described later, the medal stored as credits, and the medals used for setting the number of bets are settled ( The fare adjustment switch 10 that is operated when the credits and the number of medals used for setting the bet are returned) and the star that is operated when the game is started. To select stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when stopping the rotation of the trevor 7, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, viewing and initializing game history data relating to already played games, and selecting an effect mode. A selection switch 56 and a determination switch 57 to be operated are provided so as to be operable by the player.

  The front door also displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BET LED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is lit, 2 BET LED 15 that notifies that the bet number is 2 is lit, and that 3 bets are set 3BETLED 16 for notifying the player, the insertion request LED 17 for notifying that the medal can be inserted by lighting, the start valid LED 18 for notifying that the game start operation by operating the start lever 7 is valid, and the weight (previous game) (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 19 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED 20 during replay notifying that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 3).

  Further, inside the front door, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, a setting value described later is being changed. And a set value indicator 24 for displaying the set value at that time during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, is provided in a hopper tank (not shown). ) Side or medal payout outlet 9 side, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching, and a medal insertion sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side are provided. ing.

  Inside the casing, a reel unit (not shown) comprising the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R, and the reel sensor 33 capable of detecting the respective reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. A hopper tank (not shown) for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, a hopper motor 34 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout opening 9, and paying out by driving the hopper motor 34. A payout sensor 35 for detecting a medal and a power supply box (not shown) are provided.

  On the front of the power supply box is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later 36, automatic selection for enabling / disabling the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement at the end of the big bonus, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) It functions as a settlement switch 29, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for releasing an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. Reset / setting that functions as a setting switch to change the set value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of the internal lottery Switch 38, the power switch 39 is provided which is operated to ON / OFF the power.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become valid, and the operation of the start lever 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, as the specified number of bets, three are determined in the normal gaming state and RT described later, and one is determined in the regular bonus described later. If medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  When the start lever 7 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) is placed on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with a medal payout is available on multiple activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each of the symbol combinations aligned on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 100. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The power supply board 100 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies the drive power to each unit.

  The power supply board 100 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the. Further, the above-described hopper motor 34, payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply substrate 100.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start lever (start switch) 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, checkout switch 10, reset switch 23, insertion medal sensor 31, reel sensor 33, and the above-described payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 100. Detection signals of switches are input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 100. The hopper motor 34 is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d, a main control unit 41 for controlling the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in the present embodiment). A random number generation circuit 42 that generates a random number, a sampling circuit 43 that acquires a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 100 44, a motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a drive control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for performing power supply voltage supplied to slot machine 1 A power interruption detection circuit 48 that monitors and detects a voltage drop when the voltage drop is detected, and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 41a, the CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 for supplying a reset signal to the device and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a is provided with a plurality of registers (storage areas) for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing. Specifically, A and F registers (flag registers) that mainly store calculation data, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers that store general-purpose data, and data indicating the position of the program being executed PC register to be stored, SP register to store a stack pointer (an address indicating the current position of a stack area to be described later), an R register to store data indicating a memory block of the RAM 41c that performs a refresh operation to be described later, and the RAM 41c There are provided IX and IY registers for storing data indicating a reference position when referring to a storage area, and an I register for storing data indicating the position of an interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via the signal input terminal DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4 can be executed. For each interrupt, a counter mode (a signal from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA) is provided. An interrupt mode that generates an external interrupt according to the input) or a timer mode (an interrupt mode that generates an internal interrupt according to the number of clock inputs of the CPU 41a) can be selected and set. .

  In the present embodiment, among interrupts 1 to 4, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupt 3 is set to the timer mode, and interrupts 1 and 4 are unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Execute interrupt processing. Further, the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 3 every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment), and a timer interruption process (main) described later. Execute. Moreover, although the interrupts 1 and 4 are set to unused, the interrupts 1 and 4 may generate | occur | produce by noise etc. For this reason, when interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  The CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 1 to 4, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, interrupts to be executed with priority in the order of interrupts 2, 3, 1, 4 are set. In other words, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 3 and interrupt 1 or 4 occur simultaneously, interrupt 3 is prioritized. To run.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 1 to 4. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with a refresh register 41R (see FIG. 50) for performing this refresh operation. The refresh register 41R is composed of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b, and the value is updated every execution time of one instruction. It is.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power from the power supply board 100 even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to store data stored in the RAM 41c. Is to be retained.

  Further, the CPU 41a acquires the state of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29 at the time of start-up, and sets the stop function valid / invalid and the automatic checkout function valid / invalid in a specific register of the CPU 41a. It has become. The states of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29 are acquired only at the time of activation, and the stop and automatic checkout functions are enabled / disabled based on the acquired state. Even if the switch 29 is operated, a new stop / automatic settlement function is not enabled / disabled.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In the present embodiment, 0 to 16383 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main), and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and a reel LED 55 disposed on the front door of the slot machine 1 are connected to the rendering control board 90. The components are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  The effect control board 90 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d in the same manner as the main control part 41. The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A liquid crystal driving circuit 92 for controlling the driving of the connected liquid crystal display 51, a lamp driving circuit 93 for controlling the driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling the audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a when it is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 91a, and other circuits are mounted. The CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40. In addition to performing various controls to produce effects, Directly or indirectly controls each unit of the onboard control circuit 90.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. An interrupt terminal (not shown) of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command among command transmission lines. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. The CPU 91a executes a timer interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the CPU 41a, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT), the CPU 91a interrupts the process even when an interrupt process based on another interrupt is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the top, and even if another interrupt occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power in the event of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  Next, details of wiring connection states between the game control board 40 and various game electronic components connected to the game control board 40 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing a wiring connection state between the game control board 40 and the game electronic components connected to the game control board 40.

  As described above, on the game control board 40, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start lever 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, and the reel sensor 33L. 33C, 33R, payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and effect control board 90 are connected.

  FIG. 4 shows a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting the number of bets among electronic components such as various switches and sensors connected to the game control board 40, and when starting a game. The start lever 7 to be operated, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R to be operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the inserted medal sensor 31 for detecting the medals inserted to set the bet number, Reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R for detecting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a payout sensor 35 for detecting medals to be paid out when a winning occurs, and an effect control board 90 are shown, and other switches, Illustrations of sensors and the like are omitted.

  The gaming electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32 L, 32 C, 32 R, 33 L, 33 C, 33 R, 34, and 35 excluding the effect control board 90 send signals related to the progress of the game to the game control board 40. It is an electronic component that inputs and outputs. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets for making the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reels, detection of the payout medals, etc., output from the game electronic components in accordance with the progress of the game And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, and 35 output signals to the game control board 40 as the game progresses. 1 electronic component and a second electronic component to which a signal from the game control board 40 is input as the game progresses.

  Specifically, the single bet switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 that are operated when setting the bet number and the inserted medal sensor 31 that detects a medal inserted to set the bet number are used for the operation or medal of the medal. This is a first electronic component that outputs a BET signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection. Since the main control unit 41 performs the betting number setting process based on the reception of the BET signal, the betting number cannot be set without these electronic components. That is, since the game cannot be started unless the number of bets is set, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are electronic components for games necessary for the progress of the game.

  The start lever 7 that detects an operation for starting a game is a first electronic component that outputs a start signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the operation. Since the main control unit 41 performs a process (reel rotation process or the like) for starting the game based on the reception of the start signal, the game cannot be started without this electronic component. That is, the start lever 7 is a gaming electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  Stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that detect an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are first electronic components that output a stop signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the operation. is there. The main control unit 41 performs the process of deriving the display result by stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the reception of the stop signal. The display result of cannot be derived. That is, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are first electronic components that output a detection signal for the reference position of the reel to the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 does not have this electronic component because it performs processing to stop the rotation by grasping the positions of the symbols of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R based on the reception of the detection signal of the reference position of the reels. In addition, the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R cannot be derived, and winning determinations cannot be performed. That is, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  A payout sensor 35 that detects medals to be paid out when a winning occurs is a first electronic component that outputs a medal payout signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the medals. The main control unit 41 performs a payout process for paying out the number of medals corresponding to the generated winning based on the reception of the payout medal detection signal, so that the number of medals corresponding to the generated winning is obtained without this electronic component. Cannot be paid out. That is, the payout sensor 35 is a game electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R that rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are second electronic components to which a drive signal output from the game control board 40 is input. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the input of the drive signal output from the game control board 40 and start the symbol variation display. Even if the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not actually rotated based on the above, the main control unit 41 receives the signals from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R after outputting the reel drive signals. The game can be controlled to proceed as the reel rotates. However, the timing at which signals are input to the game control board 40 from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R is an error unless the reel drive signal is output. In order to measure the output timing of the signal based on the detection of the rotation of the reel, a reel drive signal is required. That is, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The hopper motor 34 that drives the hopper tank that pays out medals is a second electronic component that receives a drive signal output from the game control board 40 in response to the occurrence of a prize. The hopper motor 34 drives the hopper tank based on the input of the drive signal output from the game control board 40 and pays out medals, but does not actually drive the hopper tank based on the signal input. Even if the main control unit 41 outputs the hopper tank drive signal and then receives the signal from the payout sensor 35, the main control unit 41 can perform control to advance the game as if the medal has been paid out. it can. However, the timing at which a signal is input from the payout sensor 35 to the game control board 40 is an error unless the hopper tank drive signal is output. Therefore, when the game is advanced by the driving tool described above, In order to measure the output timing of the signal based on the detection, a driving signal for the hopper tank is required. That is, the hopper motor 34 is a gaming electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  These gaming electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, and 35 are basically electronic devices that are continuously used in common for a plurality of models. Since it is a component and there are few opportunities to remove it from the main body and replace it unless a failure or the like occurs, it is fixed at a predetermined position of the main body of the slot machine. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when removing the game control board 40, it is necessary to release the connection with the game electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, 35. The gaming electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, 35 and the game control board 40 are connected via a relay board, and these The boards and the board and the game electronic component are connected via a cable. The cable and the board are electrically connected by connecting a cable side connector provided at an end of the cable and a board side connector electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board.

  Specifically, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start lever 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are connected to the game control board 40 via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34 and the payout sensor 35 are connected via the power supply board 100. Thus, the game control board 40 is connected to the game control board 40, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 100, and the effect control board 90 include the game control board 40 and the electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, Wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting 33R, 34, and 35 are provided, and each electronic component 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, A detection signal output from 35 to the game control board 40 or power or a signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In addition, the game control board 40 is connected by wiring the various electronic components and the game control board 40 via the relay boards 110, 120, 100, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 as described above. From the above, it becomes easy to organize wiring with a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1, and the connector connection portion is always provided on the relay board or the game control board 40. As a result, the connector connecting portion of each electronic component is fixed, so that it is possible to prevent the connector connecting portion from being searched for during the wiring connecting operation or to make a mistake in the type of wiring to be connected.

  The game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 are connected via a cable 600a, and the game control board 40 and the reel relay board 120 are connected via a cable 600b, and the game control board 40 and the power supply board 100 are connected to each other. Are connected via a cable 600c, and the effect control board 90 and the effect relay board 80 are connected via a cable 600d.

  The operation unit relay board 110 and the single BET switch 5 are connected via a cable 601a, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the MAXBET switch 6 are connected via a cable 601b, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the start lever 7 are connected to each other. Are connected via a cable 601c, the operation part relay board 110 and the stop switch 8L are connected via a cable 601d, and the operation part relay board 110 and the stop switch 8C are connected via a cable 601e. The board 110 and the stop switch 8R are connected via a cable 601f, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the inserted medal sensor 31 are connected via a cable 601g.

  The reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32L are connected via a cable 601h, the reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32C are connected via a cable 601j, and the reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32R are connected to a cable 601l. Connected through. The reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33L are connected via a cable 601i, the reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33C are connected via a cable 601k, and the reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33L are connected to a cable 601m. Connected through. The power supply board 100 and the hopper motor 34 are connected via a cable 601n, the power supply board 100 and the payout sensor 35 are connected via a cable 601o, and the effect relay board 80 and the effect control board 90 are connected with a cable 601p. Connected through.

  Each of these cables 600a to 600c and 601a to 601o is connected to each board by a connector so that the wiring connection with the board can be released. Specifically, cable-side connectors 610a and 611a are provided at both ends of the cable 600a. One cable-side connector 610a is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620a fixed to the game control board 40. The other cable side connector 611a is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 621a fixed to the operation unit relay board 110. Cable side connectors 610b and 611b are provided at both ends of the cable 600b. One cable side connector 610b is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 620b fixed to the game control board 40, and the other side. The cable-side connector 611b is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621b fixed to the reel relay board 120. Cable-side connectors 610c and 611c are provided at both ends of the cable 600c. One cable-side connector 610c is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620c fixed to the game control board 40. The cable-side connector 611c is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621c fixed to the power supply board 100. Cable-side connectors 610d and 611d are provided at both ends of the cable 600d. One cable-side connector 610d is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620d fixed to the game control board 40, and the other The cable-side connector 611d is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621d fixed to the effect relay board 80.

  Further, a cable-side connector 612 a that can be connected to a board-side connector 622 a fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601 a that has one end connected to the BET switch 5. At the other end of the cable 601b whose one end is connected to the MAXBET switch 6, a cable-side connector 612b that can be connected to the board-side connector 622b fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601c whose one end is connected to the start lever 7, a cable-side connector 612c that can be connected to the board-side connector 622c fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601d, one end of which is connected to the stop switch 8L, a cable side connector 612d that can be connected to the board side connector 622d fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601e whose one end is connected to the stop switch 8C, a cable-side connector 612e that can be connected to the board-side connector 622e fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601f whose one end is connected to the stop switch 8R, a cable-side connector 612f that can be connected to the board-side connector 622f fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. A cable-side connector 612g that can be connected to a board-side connector 622g fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601g that has one end connected to the inserted medal sensor 31.

  Further, the other end of the cable 601h whose one end is connected to the reel motor 32L and the other end of the cable 601i whose one end is connected to the reel sensor 33L can be connected to the board-side connector 622h fixed to the reel relay board 120. A cable-side connector 612h is provided. A cable that can be connected to the board-side connector 622i fixed to the reel relay board 120 at the other end of the cable 601j whose one end is connected to the reel motor 32C and the other end of the cable 601k whose one end is connected to the reel sensor 33C. A side connector 612i is provided. A cable connectable to a board-side connector 622j fixed to the reel relay board 120 at the other end of the cable 601l having one end connected to the reel motor 32R and the other end of the cable 601m connected to the reel sensor 33R. A side connector 612j is provided.

  Further, the other end of the cable 601n whose one end is connected to the hopper motor 34 and the other end of the cable 601o whose one end is connected to the payout sensor 35 can be connected to a board-side connector 622k fixed to the power supply board 100. A cable-side connector 612k is provided.

  Further, cable-side connectors C2 and C3 are provided at both ends of the cable 601p, and one cable-side connector C2 is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector C1 fixed to the game control board 40. The other cable side connector C3 is a connector that can be connected to a board side connector C4 fixed to the effect control board 90.

  In the present embodiment, wiring is extended from each electronic component 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, and 35 without a connector. However, it may be connected to wiring via a connector.

  As described above, each board and each cable includes board-side connectors 620a to 620d, 621a to 621d, 622a to 622k, C1 and C4 provided on the board side, and cable-side connectors 610a to 610d provided on the cable side. Wiring is connected via a pair of connectors (male connector and female connector) consisting of 611a to 611d, 612a to 612k, C2, and C3, and the wiring connection is released by removing the cable side connector from the board side connector. Can be done. In particular, the game control board 40, the operation part relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power board 100, and the effect control board 90 are attached to predetermined locations on the casing or front door of the slot machine 1, so that the board side Since the cable side connector can be easily removed from the connector, the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 can be easily replaced.

  First, the first electronic component will be described in detail. One of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, or the connector of a cable provided between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is driven into a connector. If the BET signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40, there is a possibility that the bet number is set even though the bet number setting operation is not performed. When a connector of a driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the start lever 7 and the game control board 40, and a start signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40 There is a possibility that the game is started without performing the game start operation. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40, and the stop signal is illegally transmitted from the driving tool to the game control board 40. If output, the rotation of the reel may be stopped without performing a stop operation. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R and the game control board 40, and the reel rotation signal is illegal from the driving tool to the game control board 40. Is output, the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be derived and winning decisions may be performed without rotating the reels. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the payout sensor 35 and the game control board 40, and a medal payout signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40. There is a risk that the medals will be counted without paying out medals.

  The second electronic component will be described in detail. The game control board 40 is released by disconnecting one of the connectors of the cable provided between the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the game control board 40. When the driving signal output from the game control board 40 can be acquired by the driving tool, the timing at which the driving signal of the reel is output from the game control board 40 can be specified on the driving tool side, so game control is originally performed from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R There is a possibility that the reel rotation detection signal input to the substrate 40 may be output from the driving tool at an appropriate timing after the reel rotation. In addition, the drive signal output from the game control board 40 can be acquired by a driving tool or the like after the connection at any of the connectors of the cable provided between the hopper motor 34 and the game control board 40 is released. Then, since the timing at which the driving signal of the hopper tank is output from the game control board 40 can be specified on the driving instrument side, the payout medal detection signal originally input from the payout sensor 35 to the game control board 40 is sent from the driving tool to the hopper tank. May be output at an appropriate timing after driving.

  As described above, the signals that are output from the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 according to the progress of the game and that are originally input to the game control board 40 are provided. When output from the driving tool, the main control unit 41 can perform control to advance the game based on the reception of the signal, and is output from the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game. When a signal input to the second electronic component 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 is input to the driving tool, on the driving tool side, an output timing of a signal output from the main control unit 41 after driving the reel motor or the hopper motor When a new signal is input to the game control board 40 based on this, the main control unit 41 plays the game based on the reception of the signal. It is possible to perform the control of the line, there is a possibility that fraud such causes game automatically proceed is performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, various measures are taken to prevent fraud by connecting the driving tool.

Next, the structure around the power supply to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40 will be described.
The game control board 40 is supplied with + 5V DC voltage generated by the voltage generation circuit of the power supply board 100. The + 5V DC voltage supplied from the power supply board 100 is supplied to the VDD input terminal as a drive power supply for the main control unit 41, and branches on the game control board 40 as shown in FIG. 5 to + 5V (VBB). A DC voltage supply line is formed. The + 5V (VBB) DC voltage supply line is connected to the memory backup power supply input terminal VBB of the main control unit 41 via a backflow prevention diode 312 and is set to the ground level on the power supply substrate 100 side. A large capacity capacitor (not shown) is provided between them. Accordingly, a DC voltage of +5 V (VBB) can be stored in the capacitor, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off, the voltage stored in the capacitor is held in the storage state of the RAM 41c in the main control unit 41. It can be supplied as a backup power source.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the + 5V (VBB) DC voltage supply line is not directly connected to the memory backup power input terminal VBB of the main control unit 41 on the game control board 40, but in FIG. As shown, the cable 600a for wiring connection between the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110, the operation unit relay board 110, the cable 601g for wiring connection between the operation unit relay board 110 and the insertion medal sensor 31, and the insertion It is turned back by the medal sensor 31 and connected again to the game control board 40 via the cable 601g, the operation part relay board 110, and the cable 600a, and is connected to the memory backup power input terminal VBB of the main control part 41. That is, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off, the voltage stored in the capacitor is from the game control board 40 to the cable 600a-operation part relay board 110-cable 601g-inserted medal sensor 31-cable 601g-operation part relay. After passing through the board 110-cable 600a, it is supplied to the main control unit 41, and the storage state of the RAM 41c in the main control unit 41 is maintained.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in a state where power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off, the connection between the board-side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable-side connector 610a of the cable 600a, and the cable-side connector of the cable 600a 611a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and the connection between the board-side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g are released, and the backup is performed. The power supply line is cut off, and the data in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 cannot be held and will be lost. That is, when even one connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the backup data held in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is lost.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start lever 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the power interruption interrupt process is executed when the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 detects the voltage drop signal. In the power interruption interrupt processing, a register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (in this embodiment, 5AH) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, that is, other than 0 Specific data is stored, and the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. . Note that the RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in the present embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c. If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until For this reason, for example, it is possible to prevent a go-to action that intentionally causes an abnormality in the data in the RAM for the purpose of operating the slot machine with the abnormal data and thereby obtaining a profit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released even at one place, the backup held in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Since the data is lost, the destructive diagnosis data is also cleared and becomes 00H. Therefore, when starting in this state, the CPU 41a determines that there is a RAM abnormal error and disables the progress of the game. Also in this case, the RAM abnormality error state is not canceled until a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above.

  Further, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the bet number set in the game in the internal lottery process described later is a bet number corresponding to the gaming state. And even when the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set and controlled to the RAM abnormal error state, so that the progress of the game is disabled. It is like that. As described above, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated unlike the other error states, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the bet number set in the internal lottery process described later is a bet number according to the gaming state, and whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is an appropriate value. judge.

  Even when the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, or when the set value used for the internal lottery is not an appropriate value, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM abnormal error code is set and the RAM is set. The game is controlled to an abnormal error state and the progress of the game is disabled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game from being played with a bet number that is not determined according to the gaming state and a game from being performed with an abnormal set value (including those caused by fraudulent acts, respectively). As described above, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated unlike the other error states, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  Further, when the CPU 41a returns the processing state to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c at the time of activation, whether or not the winning flag of any special role is set, that is, the power interruption It is determined whether or not any special role has been won before, and if the winning flag for any special role is set, a power-on command is sent to indicate the special role and the sub-control is sent. Instruct the part 91 to notify that the special role is won. On the other hand, if the winning flag for any special combination is not set, a power-on command indicating that the special combination is not won is transmitted. When the sub-control unit 91 receives a power-on command from the main control unit 41 at the time of startup, the sub-control unit 91 performs a notification effect indicating that the special role is won by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like if the command is a power-on command indicating that the special role is won. Then, it continues until the special combination wins, but if it is a power-on command indicating that the special combination is not won, it will return to the backed-up performance state.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 produces the effect even if the backup is normal until it receives a power-on command or an initialization command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized as will be described later. There is no return to the state, and even if another command is received, the production is not controlled accordingly. For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 can Since the initialization command is not received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission line of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 is disconnected at the time of activation, the power-on command is issued on the sub control unit 91 side. It is impossible to avoid the reception of the special announcement and the announcement effect indicating that the special role is won.

  That is, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and when the special role is elected before the power interruption, a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is transmitted. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command indicating the winning, the sub-control unit 91 executes a notification effect indicating the winning of the special role, and avoids receiving the power-on command on the side of the sub-control unit 91 to notify the winning of the special role. Since it is impossible to avoid the execution of the production, when the main control unit 41 is restored to the state before the power interruption and the special role is elected before the power interruption as described above, The winning of special role will be notified.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus, a normal gaming state, and an RT (replay time) as the gaming state, and among these, 1 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus, 3 is defined as the specified number of bets corresponding to the normal gaming state and RT. For this reason, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started when the betting number is set to 1, and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RT, the betting number is set to 3. And the game can be started. In the present embodiment, when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state is set, all the winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number according to the gaming state. If 1 is set, all pay lines L1 to L5 are activated at the time when 1 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number according to the gaming state is 3, the point at which 3 is set as the bet number Thus, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the winning line that is activated (in this embodiment, all the winning lines are always activated, In the following description, an activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line). The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these roles, the winning flags for the small role and the replaying role are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a winning combination table by gaming state. The gaming state winning combination table is stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 and is used to determine the combination determined to be winning in the internal lottery. The combination determined according to the game state is shown. In this slot machine 1, as a special role, a regular bonus, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2) are JAC, cherry, 1 piece (1), 1 piece (2), a bell, Replay is defined as a re-playing role.

  In the regular bonus game state, JAC, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and Bells, which are small roles, are determined as winning roles, and are subject to lottery in the internal lottery in the regular bonus. Is done. In the normal gaming state, a regular bonus that is a special role, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a cherry that is a small role, 1 (1), 1 (2) and a bell, and a replay that is a re-game Is determined as a winning combination, and is a lottery target in an internal lottery in a normal gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in the regular bonus game state, in addition to cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and a bell, JAC is determined as a small winning role. Also in the gaming state, as in the normal gaming state, only the cherry, one (1), one (2), and the bell may be determined as small winning combinations.

  JAC wins when a combination of “Bell-Bell-Watermelon” is found on any of the winning lines in the regular bonus, and 15 medals are paid out, but this combination is available in gaming states other than the regular bonus. Even if it does not, it will not be a JAC prize. Cherry is awarded when the “Cherry” symbol is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and 2 medals are paid out in the normal gaming state and 15 in the regular bonus. It is. When the “Cherry” symbol stops at the upper or lower level of the left reel, the combination of cherries is aligned on the two winning lines L2 and L4 or the winning lines L3 and L5. It means that the cherries are won on the winning line, and 4 cards are paid out in the normal gaming state. In the regular bonus, the total number is 30, but exceeds the upper limit of 15, so in this case, 15 are paid out. One (1) will be awarded when the combination of “Blue 7-Red 7-Watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, one in the normal gaming state, and in the regular bonus 15 medals are paid out. One (2) will be awarded when the combination of “Red 7-Blue 7-Watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, one in the normal gaming state, and in the regular bonus 15 medals are paid out. Bell is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is placed on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 8 medals are paid out in the normal gaming state and 15 medals in the regular bonus. It is. The payout of medals when these small roles are won will be described later.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, but with the regular bonus, even if this combination is arranged, the replay is not won. When a replay is won, the medals will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets no longer required to be set in the next game (the regular bonus will not be replayed and will always be 3) This is substantially the same as when three corresponding medals are paid out.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  The big bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” or a combination of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the big bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus. When transitioning to the big bonus, the transition to the regular bonus is performed at the same time as the transition to the big bonus, and when the regular bonus ends, if the big bonus has not ended, the transition is made to the regular bonus again and repeated until the big bonus ends Controlled by regular bonus. That is, during the big bonus, the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus reaches 466. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the game state is the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When it is necessary to distinguish between the big bonus by “red 7-red 7-red 7” and the big bonus by “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2 ). Further, the regular bonus (1), the big bonus (1), and the big bonus (2) described above may be collectively referred to simply as “bonus”.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery will be described. The internal lottery decides whether or not the winning of each winning combination is allowed before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, it is performed according to the acquired random number for internal lottery, the number of bets set by the player, and the determination value number of each combination determined according to the set value. It is.

  The reference of the combination according to the game state is performed according to the combination table according to the game state shown in FIG. When the gaming state is a regular bonus (including a case where the bonus is provided during a big bonus), JAC, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and bell are read in order as an internal lottery target role, When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, regular bonus, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), bell, and replay are in turn as the internal lotteries. Read out. However, if the winning flag of the regular bonus, big bonus (1), big bonus (2) is set in the game before the previous game and the game is carried over without winning based on the flag, the regular bonus, big bonus (1 ), Big Bonus (2) will not be a target for internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, the number of determination values determined for the internal lottery target combination is sequentially added to the internal lottery random number, and when the addition result overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. When the winning is determined, the winning flag of the combination is set in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. The determination value number is read according to the storage address of the determination value number registered in the role-specific table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control unit 41.

  FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating an example of the role-specific table. The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes.

  The number of determination values for each combination is registered corresponding to the number of bets (BET) set by the player. This is because even if they have the same combination, the winning probabilities may differ depending on the number of bets. In addition, the number of determination values according to the number of bets for each combination may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  In the role table, as shown in FIG. 6B, regular bonus, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), JAC, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), bell, replay The storage addresses for the number of judgment values are registered.

  The regular bonus is a role that is an object of an internal lottery in the normal gaming state, and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state is registered. For the regular bonus, the common flag is 0, and the storage address for the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value.

  The big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) are internal lottery targets in the normal gaming state, and the storage addresses for the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state are registered. . For the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2), the common flag is 0, and the storage address for the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value.

  The JAC is a role that is subject to internal lottery only with the regular bonus, and the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 1 with the regular bonus is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and Bell are roles that are subject to internal lottery in both the regular bonus and the normal gaming state, and correspond to 1 bet with the regular bonus. A storage address for the number of determination values and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state are registered. Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2) have a common flag of 1, and storage addresses for the same number of judgment values are registered for each bet regardless of the set value. Yes. For the bell, the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value corresponding to each bet number.

  Replay is a combination that is a target of an internal lottery in the normal gaming state, and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state is registered. The common flag of this combination is 1, and the storage address of the common determination value number is registered regardless of the set value corresponding to each bet number.

  Also, the number of medals to be paid out when winning each winning combination is registered in the role-specific table. Of course, only the JAC, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2) and Bells that are the payouts of medals when winning a prize are included. Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and Bell can be awarded when the number of bets is 1 (regular bonus) or 3 (normal game state). When the bet number is 1, that is, when the gaming state is in the regular bonus, more medals are paid out than when the bet number is 3, that is, when the gaming state is in the normal gaming state. In addition, when “cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage of the left reel, the combination of cherries is aligned on the two pay lines as described above, so the total number of payouts is paid out. It will be. In the present embodiment, since the number of cherries paid out is 2 in the normal gaming state, 4 medals are paid out. In the regular bonus, the number of cherries paid out is 15, but the total number exceeds the upper limit of 15, so in this case, 15 medals are paid out.

  The regular bonus, the big bonus (1), and the big bonus (2) are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state, and are not eligible for payout of medals. The replay does not involve paying out medals, but it is substantially the same as paying out 3 medals because it is not necessary to insert medals for setting the number of bets in the next game (always the normal gaming state).

  FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a storage area for the number of determination values acquired based on addresses registered in the role-specific table. The storage area for the number of determination values is provided in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 in the development model, and in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the main control unit 41 in the mass production model.

  For example, the addresses ADD + 36 and ADD + 74 are addresses that are referred to regardless of the bet number and the set value when the target of the internal lottery is JAC and replay, respectively, 2245 is acquired as the number of determination values.

  The address ADD is an address that is referred to when the number of bets is 3, that is, in the normal gaming state, when the target character of the internal lottery is a regular bonus and the set value is 1, and at this time, the value stored here 31 is acquired as the number of determination values. Addresses ADD + 2, ADD + 4, ADD + 6, ADD + 8, and ADD + 10 are addresses that are referenced when the number of bets is 3, that is, when the target character of the internal lottery is a regular bonus and the set value is 2 to 6 in the normal gaming state. is there. Regarding the regular bonus, when the number of bets is 3, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value. However, since the same number of determination values is stored, the regular bonus of any set value is stored. The winning probability is the same.

  Addresses ADD + 12, ADD + 14, ADD + 16, ADD + 18, ADD + 20, and ADD + 22 are each when the number of bets is 3, that is, when the target for internal lottery is a big bonus (1) and the set value is 1 to 6 in the normal gaming state The address to be referenced. Addresses ADD + 24, ADD + 26, ADD + 28, ADD + 30, ADD + 32, and ADD + 34 are each when the number of bets is 3, that is, in the normal gaming state, when the internal lottery target is a big bonus (2) and the set value is 1-6 The address to be referenced. For the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2), the number of judgment values referred to when the number of bets is 3 is individually stored according to the set value, and a different number of judgment values is stored. The winning probabilities differ depending on the set value.

  The address ADD + 38 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the bet number is 1, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target character of the internal lottery is cherry. The address ADD + 40 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the bet number is 3, that is, when the target character of the internal lottery is cherry in the normal gaming state. The number of judgment values for cherry is registered according to the number of bets, but since the same value is registered, the winning probability of cherry is the same regardless of whether it is a regular bonus or a normal gaming state Become. The number of determination values is also registered in the same way for addresses ADD + 42 and ADD + 44 for one sheet (1), and the number of determination values is also registered for addresses ADD + 46 and ADD + 48 for one sheet (2).

  Addresses ADD + 50, ADD + 52, ADD + 54, ADD + 56, ADD + 58, and ADD + 60 are addresses that are referenced when the bet number is 1, that is, when the target character of the internal lottery is a bell and the set value is 1 to 6 in the regular bonus. is there. Since the same value is registered in each of the addresses ADD + 50 and ADD + 52, ADD + 54 and ADD + 56, and ADD + 58 and ADD + 60, the set value 1 and the set value 2, the set value 3 and the set value 4 and the set value are set at the regular bonus time. With 5 and the set value 6, the winning probability of the bell is the same.

  Addresses ADD + 62, ADD + 64, ADD + 66, ADD + 68, ADD + 70, and ADD + 72 are addresses that are referenced when the number of bets is 3, that is, in the normal game state, when the target character of the internal lottery is the bell and the set value is 1-6. It is. Since different values are registered in the addresses ADD + 62, ADD + 64, ADD + 66, ADD + 68, ADD + 70, and ADD + 72, the winning probability of the bell varies depending on the set value in the normal gaming state.

  FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 are diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery and the number of determination values of each combination and the winning combination. FIG. 8 shows an example in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 9 shows an example in the small role game. 8 and 9 both show an example when the set value is 6, and also show an example when neither of the regular bonus and the big bonus winning flag is set.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8, in the normal gaming state, the roles that are the targets of the internal lottery are regular bonus, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), cherry, 1 (1), 1 ( 2) Bell and replay. In the setting value 6, the number of determination values is 31, 20, 40, 96, 163, 163, 2082, and 2245, respectively. First, the regular bonus that is the target of the internal lottery is won when 16353 to 16383, in which the addition result overflows by adding 31 judgment values, is acquired as a random number for internal lottery.

  Next, for the big bonus (1) that is the subject of the internal lottery, the addition result overflows by adding 51, which is the sum of the regular bonus judgment value number 31 and the big bonus (1) judgment value number 20. Is obtained when 16333 to 16352 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery. Similarly, Big Bonus (2) is obtained when 16293-16332 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and Cherry is 1 (1) when 16197-16292 is acquired as random number for internal lottery. When 16034-16196 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, 1 (2), when 15871-16033 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, When it is acquired as a random number for use, the replay is determined to be winning when 11544 to 13788 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery.

  The approximate winning probabilities for each combination calculated based on the number of judgment values are as follows: regular bonus (1), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2 ), Bell and Replay, 1 / 528.5, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 409.6, 1 / 170.1, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 7.9 1 / 7.3. When 0-11543 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, in the regular bonus, JAC, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and Bell are subject to internal lottery, and the number of determination values is 27, 96, 163, Since 163, 15919, 16357 to 16383, 16261 to 16356, 16098 to 16260, 15935 to 16907, and 16 to 15934 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, it is determined that they are winning. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective combinations are 1 / 606.8, 1 / 170.1, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 1.03. When 0 to 15 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  Next, acquisition of random numbers for internal lottery will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The random numbers for the internal lottery are acquired by extracting random numbers from the random number generation circuit 42 by the hardware random number function and processing them by software by the CPU 41a. Note that the least significant bit of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 or the processed random number is called the 0th bit, and the most significant bit is called the 15th bit.

  FIG. 10A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the random number generation circuit 42 in detail. As shown in the figure, the random number generation circuit 42 includes a pulse generation circuit 42a, a lower counter 42b, and an upper counter 42c. The lower counter 42b and the upper counter 42c are both 8-bit (1 byte) counters, the lower counter 42b is the 0th to 7th bits, and the upper counter 42c is a total of 16 bits from the 8th to 15th bits. The data signal is output.

  The pulse generation circuit 42a outputs a pulse signal at a frequency that is higher than the frequency of the operation clock of the CPU 41a and is not an integral multiple thereof (preferably relatively prime). The pulse signal output from the pulse generation circuit 42a is clocked into the lower counter 42b.

  The lower counter 42b alternately inverts the 0th bit data signal between the H level and the L level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit 42a. Assuming that positive logic is applied, a logical value of H level corresponds to 1 and a logical value of L level corresponds to 0. In the case of negative logic, a logic value of 1 may be read as L level, and a logic value of 0 may be read as H level. When the level of the 0th bit data signal is inverted from H level to L level, that is, whenever the logic value of the 0th bit data signal changes from 1 to 0, the level of the 1st bit data signal is changed to H level. Inverted alternately with L level.

  Similarly, when the level of the (m−1) th bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, that is, whenever the logic value of the (m−1) th bit data signal changes from 1 to 0, the mth bit data The signal level is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level. The carry signal is output every time the level of the seventh bit data signal changes from H level, that is, the logical value of the seventh bit data signal changes from 1 to 0. The carry signal output from the lower counter 42b is clocked into the upper counter 42c.

  The upper counter 42c alternately inverts the eighth bit data signal between the H level and the L level every time a carry signal is input from the lower counter 42b. Each time the level of the 9th bit data signal is inverted from H level to L level, the level of the 9th bit data signal is alternately inverted between H level and L level. Similarly, every time the level of the m−1th bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, the level of the mth bit data signal is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level.

  The logic value of a 16-bit data signal in which the data signal of the lower counter 42b is the lower 8 bits and the data signal of the upper counter 42c is the upper 8 bits is 0 (0000H) every time the pulse generation circuit 42a outputs the pulse signal. ) → 1 (0001H) → 2 (0002H) →... → 65535 (FFFFH) The values are updated so as to be continuous every update, and the maximum value 65535 (FFFFH) is next to the initial value 0 (0000H). The value circulates and is output from the random number generation circuit 42.

  The sampling circuit 43 includes a latch circuit, and latches and latches a 16-bit data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42 at that time based on a sampling command (when the start switch 7 is operated) from the CPU 41a. Output the data signal. The CPU 41a extracts numerical data corresponding to the data signal input from the sampling circuit 43 via the I / O port 41d as a random number generated by the random number generation circuit. Hereinafter, the data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42 will be described as a random number corresponding to the logical value.

  FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. The random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in a 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a uses the calculation register to store the lower byte (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) of the general-purpose register 41GR and the upper byte. The value (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c) is exchanged.

  Next, the CPU 41a performs an OR operation on the value of the random number obtained by exchanging the upper byte and the lower byte for the extracted random number with 8080H. Since the processing work of the CPU 41a is 1 byte, the logical sum operation is actually sequentially performed on the upper byte and the lower byte. By this OR operation, the 15th bit and the 7th bit are always 1. Further, the CPU 41a shifts the upper 1 byte (8th bit to 15th bit) to the lower bit by bit and inserts 1 into the empty 15th bit.

  The CPU 41a uses the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR at this time as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values for each combination. Since the 15th and 14th bits of the random number for internal lottery are always 1, the random number for internal lottery is a random number having a size of 14 bits (16384), which is substantially 0 to 16383. It takes a value.

  Note that interrupts to the CPU 41a are prohibited from the extraction of random numbers from the random number generation circuit 42 to the end of processing. This is to prevent the contents of the general-purpose register 41GR from being rewritten in the interrupt processing routine when an interrupt is generated to the CPU 41a.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.
The CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the table index stores the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored for each gaming state, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state). ing.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), bell, replay, big bonus (1) (+ lose), big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus ( 1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + Bell, Big Bonus (1) + Replay, Big Bonus (2) (+ Loss), Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Bell, Big Bonus (2) + Replay, Regular Bonus (+ Loss), Regular Bonus + Cherry, regular bonus + 1 (1), regular bonus + 1 (2), regular bonus + bell, regular bonus + replay, loser For each, the top address of the area where the data for table creation is stored is stored, and for regular bonus, table creation for each of Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), Bell, JAC, Loss Stores the start address of the area where the business data is stored. Even if the game state is different or the winning situation of the combination is different, the same control is applied (for example, the same in the cherry winning in the normal gaming state and the cherry winning in the regular bonus) In the case of applying the control, or in the case of applying the same control for the big bonus (1) + replay winning, the big bonus (2) + replay winning, and the regular bonus + replay winning) The same address is stored as the start address of the area where the table creation data is stored. In such a case, the stop control table is created with reference to the same table creation data. .

  The table creation data is composed of drawn-in frame number data indicating the number of drawn-in frames corresponding to the stop operation position, and an address of drawn-in frame number data to be referred to in accordance with the reel stop status.

  The number-of-drawing frame data referenced according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, or left Depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and in the situation where any one of the reels is stopped, Since it may vary depending on the stop position of the stopped reel, the address of the number of frames to be drawn to be referred to is registered for each rotating reel for each situation, and based on the top address of the table creation data Therefore, it is possible to specify the address of the number of frame data to be referred to according to each situation, and from this identified address, it is necessary to specify according to each situation. It has to be able to identify a lead-frame number data. Even if the reel stop status and the stop position of the stopped reel are different, the same address is registered as the address of the number of frames to be drawn when the same number of frames to be drawn is applied. In such a case, the same data for the number of drawn frames is referred to.

  The drawn frame number data is data that can specify the number of drawn frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. As shown in FIG. 12, 21 regions (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined with respect to one reel. Area numbers 1 to 21 from the position are assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. The number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule in the number of drawn frames data so that the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the number of drawn frames data. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data as described above corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (this In the embodiment, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number) located in the lower symbol area of the fluoroscopic window 3). This is a table in which the number of frames to be drawn in is detected.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the game state and the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Then, the table creation data is specified based on the acquired head address, and the address of the number of frames to be drawn for each reel corresponding to the state in which all the reels are rotating is acquired from the specified table creation data, and the acquired address The drawing frame number data of each reel stored in is developed and a stop control table is created for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel is stopped or any two reels are stopped, the top address obtained at the start of reel rotation, that is, the table creation data corresponding to the game state and the internal winning state of the game is stored. The table creation data is identified based on the head address, and the address of the number of frames to be drawn in the non-stop reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data, The number-of-drawing frame data of each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to create a stop control table for unstopped reels.

  Next, when the CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control for deriving the display result to the corresponding reel will be described. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, an area (stop point in the figure) corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn from the area (stop operation point in the figure) corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected It stops at the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol area of the see-through window 3).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as the top address of the storage area for the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state. In the table creation data, only one address is stored as the address of the storage area for the number of drawn frame data corresponding to the stop status of one reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and number-of-drawing frame number data corresponding to the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined, The stop control table created with reference to these is also unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In addition, in the table index, the number of drawn-in frames is drawn so that the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and no winning combination is arranged, corresponding to the case where any combination is won. Stores the address of the specified table creation data, and stores the address of the table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn in is determined so that none of the roles will be matched, corresponding to the case where the game is won ing. Therefore, if any winning combination is won, there will be a stop control table in which the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and the number of drawing frames to be drawn is set so that the winning combination is not aligned. While the reel stop control is performed, if a win is won, a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn that do not have any combination is determined, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to align and stop the winning combination. The symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  In addition, the table index wins in response to a small role winning (Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Bell, etc.) when a special role has been carried over from before the previous game. The number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the special role can be drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and for the stop operation position where the selected special role cannot be drawn in the range of the maximum 4 frames, the selected small role is The address of the table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to draw the maximum in the range of four frames is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the special roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line, the control is performed to stop them together. If you can't draw a special role that you have won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, you can align the symbols of the small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, control is performed to stop them all together, and the symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn.

  In addition, the table index includes a range of 4 replays corresponding to the case where a replay player is elected with a special role carried over from before the previous game (such as big bonus (1) + replay). Thus, the address of the table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be drawn to the maximum is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. In addition, as will be described later, “replay” which is a symbol constituting the re-gamer is arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range, so if the special player is carried over from before the previous game, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Regardless of the operation timing, the re-game players will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the “bell” and “replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames, for all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The “watermelon” can be stopped at any position within the range, and the reel 2R is arranged within 5 symbols, that is, at an interval of 4 frames or less. Can be stopped. In other words, when the winning flags of bell, replay, and JAC are set, the winning combination can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player.

  In addition, when the winning flag for replay is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “Replay” symbol is always used as the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. A stop control table for drawing on L2 or L5 is created, and when the “replay” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L2 or L5 for the middle reel or the right reel, the stop control table for the left reel is 5 The “replay” symbol of the number, that is, when the symbol is stopped on the winning line L2 or L5, the “replay” symbol excluding the “replay” symbol that also stops the “cherry” on the winning line L1, is a drawing range of 4 frames. A stop control table is created that pulls on the winning line L2 or L5, and the middle reel or right reel is called the left reel. In the case of stopping first, the “replay” symbol is drawn on the winning line L2 or L5, and when the left reel is stopped thereafter, the “replay” other than No. 5 on the winning line L2 or L5 is always set. Since the control for drawing the symbols is performed, for example, when the “replay” symbol No. 5 on the winning line L2 or L5 of the middle reel and the right reel is stopped, the replay and the cherry are not won simultaneously. In the left reel, the 2nd “Replay” design and the 7th “Replay” design are arranged within 4 frames, so even if control is performed to avoid the 5th “Replay” design, Regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, the replay can always be won.

  In addition, when the winning flag for the bell is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “bell” symbol is always used as the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. A stop control table is drawn in on L1, and when the “bell” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L1 of the middle reel or the right reel, the “bell” symbol is used as the stop control table for the left reel. A stop control table for drawing on the winning line L1 in the drawing range of 4 frames is created, and when the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “bell” symbol is drawn on the winning line L1, Thereafter, when the left reel is stopped, the “bell” symbol is always drawn on the winning line L1. In the left reel, the “bell” symbol and the “cherry” symbol are not arranged in succession. For this reason, the bell can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, and the bell and the cherry are not simultaneously won.

  In addition, when the winning flag of JAC is set and the left reel is still rotating, the “bell” symbol must be placed on the winning line L1 within the pull-in range of 4 frames as the middle reel stop control table. A pull-in stop control table is created, and as a right reel stop control table, a stop control table is always created in which the “watermelon” symbol is drawn onto the pay line L1 within the pull-in range of 4 frames, and the mid-reel pay line L1 is also created. In the state where the “bell” symbol is stopped or the “watermelon” symbol is stopped on the winning line L1 of the right reel, the “bell” symbol is used as a stop control table for the left reel, and the winning line is drawn in the drawing range of 4 frames. When a stop control table to be drawn onto L1 is created and the middle reel is stopped before the left reel, a “bell” symbol is placed on the winning line L1. If the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “watermelon” symbol is drawn on the winning line L1, and then the “bell” is always placed on the winning line L1 when the left reel is stopped. Control to draw the symbol is performed. In the left reel, the “bell” symbol and the “cherry” symbol are not arranged in succession. For this reason, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, JAC can always be won, and JAC and Cherry do not win at the same time.

  Next, chance eyes and reach eyes will be described. The chance chance in the present embodiment is a display mode that can be derived when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, or when one (1), one (2) is won. Yes, in this embodiment, as the display result of the left reel, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols or the “bell / red 7 • bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols, the 15th to 17th symbols “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” is stopped and all the roles are not arranged on the winning line. As a result of displaying the middle reel, “Cherry / Replay / Cherry”, No. 11-13, 20, 21 No. 1 design “Cherry Bell Cherry” stops, no display of all the roles on the winning line, as a result of the right reel display, No. 9-12 design “Replay Cherry Blue 7 Will stop, It has applied the display mode role of the shift also not aligned on a winning line as a chance eyes.

  The reach eye is a display mode that can be derived only when any bonus (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus) is won in the normal gaming state. Then, as the display result of the left reel, the display mode in which “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16 to 18 is stopped is the reach of all bonuses, and symbols 20, 20, 1 or 12 to 14 The “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the game pattern stops, the display mode in which none of the roles are aligned on the winning line stops, and the display mode in which no role is aligned on the winning line is a big bonus (1) Or apply as a regular bonus reach.

  In the present embodiment, each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is selected when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state, or when one (1), one (2) is won. Regardless of the order in which the stop operations are performed, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled to stop when each of the bonuses is controlled in a normal gaming state. Regardless of the order in which the reels are performed, the reach is controlled so that it can be derived, but the stop operation of each reel is performed in the order that satisfies a specific condition (for example, left, middle, right). You may make it possible to derive a chance or reach according to the conditions.

  Here, an example of reel stop control when the chance eyes and reach eyes are derived will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 12 shows a case where none of the winning combinations are won in the normal gaming state (losing), a case where one (1) is won without any bonus being carried over (1 (1)), If none of the bonuses have been carried over and 1 (2) has been won (1 (2)), if no bonus has been carried over and cherries have been won (Cherry), If the big bonus (1) or regular bonus is won and no other role is won (BB (1) RB), the big bonus (2) is won and no other role is won It is a figure which shows the stop control table of the left reel produced in the case (BB (2)).

  First, in a case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), a stop control table corresponding to the item of losing in FIG. 12 is created as a stop control table for the left reel. In this stop control table, “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 for all area numbers, “bell / red 7 bell” of symbols 8 to 10 and “ "Replay Blue 7 Watermelon", 12-14 design "Replay Watermelon Bell", 16-18 design "Blue 7 Watermelon Blue 7", 20, 21, 1 design "Replay The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than “watermelon bell” is specified is determined, and 2 to 4 are display results that constitute a chance eye when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any timing. In the display result of the "Replay / Watermelon / Bell" of the symbols, the "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of the symbols 8 to 10, and the "Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon" of the symbols 15 to 17 and the reach There is a 12-14 pattern "Replay Watermelon Bell" No. 6-18 symbols “Blue 7 / Watermelon / Blue 7”, 20, 21, No. 1 symbol “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” will not be derived as a display result and will eventually be a chance or reach Does not hold.

  When one (1) is won (1 (1)) with no bonuses carried over in the normal gaming state, one (1) (1) in FIG. 12 is used as the stop control table for the left reel. The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is created. In this stop control table, the display result is specified in which “blue 7” constituting one (1) combination stops on any winning line for the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21. The number of drawn frames is determined. In particular, for the region numbers 18 and 19, the number of drawn frames for specifying “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. In addition, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 4 to 8, and “Bell Red 7 Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 is specified for the region numbers 10 to 14. The number of drawn frames is determined, and the number of drawn frames for specifying a display result other than the display result including the display mode that configures the chance and reach for other area numbers is determined.

  Therefore, the timings of the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21, that is, the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected at a possible timing, a display result in which the “blue 7” symbols constituting one (1) combination stop on any winning line is derived. In particular, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timings of the area numbers 18 and 19 among the timings at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 15th to 17th symbols “Replay Blue 7 Watermelon” are derived, and if one (1) combination is not complete on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timings of the region numbers 4 to 8 among the timings at which the “blue 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result, and a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 10 to 14, “bell bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is detected. “Red 7 Bell” is derived as a display result, and in these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, a chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one (1) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of frames to be drawn to identify “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of drawn-in frames for which the display result of “Blue 7” stopping on any pay line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the sheet (1) has been won, a higher rate than the display result in which “blue 7” constituting the combination of the sheet (1) stops on any winning line is derived, Chance eyes Among the displayed results, the “Replay Watermelon Bell” and the 8th to 10th symbols derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing when one (1) cannot be won. "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" will be derived.

  When one (2) is won (1 (2)) with no bonuses carried over in the normal gaming state, one (2) is used as the left reel stop control table. The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is created. In this stop control table, for the region numbers 9 to 15, the number of drawn frames for specifying the display result that “red 7” that constitutes a combination of two (2) stops on any winning line is specified. In particular, for the region numbers 12 and 13, the number of frames to be drawn in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols is specified is determined. In addition, “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for region numbers 6 to 8, and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is specified for region numbers 17 to 21. The number of drawn frames is determined, and the number of drawn frames for specifying a display result other than the display result including the display mode that configures the chance and reach for other area numbers is determined.

  Therefore, the timing of the area numbers 9 to 15, that is, the timing at which the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2) can be drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected, a display result in which the “red 7” symbols constituting one (2) combination stop on any winning line is derived. In particular, when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 12 and 13 among the timing at which the “red 7” symbol can be drawn in a range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 8th to 10th symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” are derived, and if one (2) combination is not completed on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6 to 8 among the timings at which the “red 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols is derived as the display result and the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 17 to 21, the “replay / watermelon bell” of the 15th to 17th symbols is detected. “Blue 7 / Watermelon” is derived as the display result, and in these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, a chance chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which “Red 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of frames to be drawn to identify “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of drawn-in frames for which the display result of “Red 7” stopping on any pay line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the sheet (2) is won, a higher rate than the display result that “red 7” constituting the combination of the sheet (2) stops on any winning line is derived, Chan Among the display results constituting the eyes, “Replay Watermelon Bell” and 15 to 17 of symbols 2 to 4 derived when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won. The symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” will be derived.

  When the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, BB (1) RB (1) in FIG. 12 is used as a stop control table for the left reel. A stop control table corresponding to the item is created. In the stop control table, the number of frames to be drawn in which the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols is specified for the area numbers 6 to 8 is determined. Number of drawing frames in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the design symbol is specified is determined. The number of frames to be drawn that specifies the “replay watermelon bell” of the 12th to 14th symbols for the area number 16 is determined, and the “replay / blue” of the 15th to 17th symbols for the area number 17 is determined. “7. Watermelon” is specified, and the number of drawn frames is specified for area numbers 18 and 19, and “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” is specified for symbols 16-18. For other area numbers. Number pull frames are determined eye display result other than the display results and a display mode which constitutes a is specified.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6 to 8, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and finally on the winning line Since there will be no winning combination, a chance will be established. If the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 12 and 13, the symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are derived as the display result, and finally the big on the winning line If the combination of bonuses (15) is not aligned, no other combination will be aligned on the winning line, and a chance chance will be established. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and the winning combination is finally placed on the winning line. Since there is no match, chances will be established.

  In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 16, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 12 to 14 is derived as the display result, and at the timing of the area number 1, the left reel is When a stop operation is detected, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 20, 21, No. 1 is derived as a display result, and in any case, no winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Therefore, the reach that can appear only when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus (1) is won is established, and when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 18, The 16th to 18th symbols “blue 7, watermelon, blue 7” are derived as the display result, and the reach that is common to all bonuses is established.

  When the big bonus (2) is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, the stop control corresponding to the item of BB (2) in FIG. A table is created. In this stop control table, the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4 is specified for the area numbers 4-7 is determined, and 8-10 for the area numbers 12-14. The number of drawn frames in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the number symbol is specified is determined, and the number of drawn frames in which “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the number 15 to 17 is identified for the area number 17 The number of frames to be drawn in which “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” of the symbols 16 to 18 is specified for the area numbers 19 to 21 is determined. The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than the display result having the display mode that constitutes the eye is specified is determined.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the region numbers 4 to 7, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and the region numbers 12 to 14 When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of, the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols is derived as the display result, and the winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Since there is no chance, a chance will be established. If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and finally a big is displayed on the winning line. If the combination of bonus (2) is not complete, no other combination will be aligned on the winning line, so a chance will be established. In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 19 to 21, “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16 to 18 is derived as a display result and is common to all bonuses. The reach will be established.

  As described above, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4, No. of 8-10 A stop control table that can specify “bell / red 7 / bell”, “replay / blue 7 / watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  Or, when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (1) cannot be awarded among the display results constituting the chance eye , "Replay watermelon bell" of the 2nd to 4th symbols, and "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of the 8th to 10th symbols can be specified as the display result, and "Blue" constituting the combination of one (1) 7 ”is a stop control table that can specify“ Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon ”of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbols can be stopped on the winning line. It is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  In addition, when only one (2) is won in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (2) cannot be awarded among the display results constituting the chance eyes In addition, “Replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay blue 7 watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 can be specified as display results, and constitute one (2) combination “ A stop control table that can specify “bell, red 7, bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the “red 7” symbol can be stopped on the winning line. Is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  As a result, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, or when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, or in the normal gaming state In this case, when only one winning combination (2) is won, reel stop control is performed based on a stop control table from which chance chances can be derived. In particular, when only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, when the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) cannot be stopped on the winning line, 2-4 It is possible to derive “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the symbols and “Bell, Red 7 and Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 as the display results, and “Blue 7” constituting a combination of one (1). When the symbol can be stopped on the winning line, it becomes possible to derive “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of No. 15 to 17 as the display result, and only one (2) in the normal gaming state. When winning, if the “Red 7” symbols that make up the combination of two (2) cannot be stopped on the winning line, the “Replay Watermelon Bell”, No. 2-4 symbols, The 17th pattern When “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” can be derived as a display result, and the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2) can be stopped on the winning line, the 8th to 10th The symbol “bell / red 7 / bell” can be derived as a display result.

  In addition, when any of the roles is not won in the normal gaming state, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance eye, the “bell / red 7 • bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols A stop control table capable of specifying display results other than “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is created as a stop control table for the left reel. Thus, when any combination is not won in the normal gaming state, the reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table that does not derive the chance.

  Also, if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, or if only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, and in the normal gaming state In the case where only one (2) is elected, “Replay Watermelon” of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance chance when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12 and 13・ "Bell" or 8-10 symbols "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" are derived as display results, but if no role is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the area number 6, Even if a stop operation is detected at any of timings 7, 12, and 13, "Replay / Watermelon Bell" of symbols 2 to 4 or "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of symbols 8 to 10 are displayed as display results. Derived Rukoto is not. In other words, when the bonus or one (1) or one (2) is won, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived by performing the operation of stopping the left reel at the timing described above. On the other hand, if none of the winning combinations is won, even if the left reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  At the start of reel rotation, the above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a stop control table for the left reel, and any one of the middle reel and the right reel is stopped. Even if both the middle reel and the right reel are stopped, if the symbols that make up the winning combination are on the winning line, The above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a left reel stop control table, except for a case where there is a possibility that the left winning will occur. In other words, when the left reel is stopped first, or when it is stopped second or third, the combination of symbols that make up the winning bonus is on the winning line of the already stopped reel Or, unless there is a possibility that a winning combination will win from the display result of a reel that has already been stopped, whether 1 (1) or 1 (2) will be won in the normal gaming state, If any bonus is won, the reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table from which the chance can be derived. If no combination is won, the chance is not derived. The reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table.

  In addition, for the middle reel and the right reel, stop control that can derive a chance when one (1) or one (2) is won in the normal gaming state or one of the bonuses is won. Stop control is performed based on the table.

  Although not specifically shown, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel is Creates a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is defined as the stop control table for the middle reel, regardless of the display result of the reels that have already stopped in the rotating state. In the state where at least one of the reels has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel, the right reel is configured as a stop control table. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result to be specified is specified is created.

  In addition, when only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and one on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. When the “Blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of (1) are not stopped, the stop control in which the number of drawing frames for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye is determined as the stop control table for the middle reel. The table is created, and at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the "Blue 7" symbol that constitutes one (1) combination on the winning line of the left reel stops If not, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “red 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination on the winning line of the middle reel If not stopped, the stop control table of the right reel, stop control table number pull frame is defined to display results constituting the chances eyes is identified is created.

  In addition, when only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and one on the winning line of the left reel with the middle reel still rotating. When the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) is stopped, one sheet is placed on the winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel as a stop control table for the middle reel. The winning line in which the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel and the “Red 7” symbol is stopped in the area where the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. Stop control in which the number of pull-in frames for which the display result to be stopped is specified is determined and the number of pull-in frames for which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified for a part of the other area is determined Table is created and left reel When the “Blue 7” symbol constituting one (1) combination on the winning line is not stopped, the number of drawn frames in which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified as the middle reel stop control table Is generated.

  In addition, when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and one on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. When the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) is not stopped, the stop control in which the number of drawing frames for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye is defined as the middle reel stop control table. The table is created, and at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes one (2) combination on the left reel winning line stops If not, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes one (2) combination on the winning line of the middle reel If not stopped, the stop control table of the right reel, stop control table number pull frame is defined to display results constituting the chances eyes is identified is created.

  In addition, when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and one on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. When the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) is stopped, one sheet is placed on the winning line where the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel, as a stop control table for the middle reel. The winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel and the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped in the area where the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of (2) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. Stop control in which the number of pull-in frames for which the display result to be stopped is specified is determined and the number of pull-in frames for which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified for a part of the other area is determined Table is created and left reel When the “red 7” symbol constituting one (2) combination on the winning line is not stopped, the number of drawn frames in which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified as the stop control table for the middle reel Is generated.

  On the other hand, if none of the winning combinations are won in the normal gaming state, the display constituting the chance eye is used as the stop control table for the middle reel or the right reel regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. A stop control table in which the number of drawn frames other than the result is determined is created.

  Specifically, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. In the state, the stop control table for the middle reel created regardless of the display result of the already stopped reels has the “cherry replay cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers. , 20, 21, when the number of frames to be drawn in which “Cherry Bell Cherry” is identified is determined, and when a stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers, 11-13 One of the symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 20, 21, and the symbol “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as the display result. Since the winning combination to finally pay line will not be aligned, so that the chance eyes is established.

  In the normal gaming state, when any of the bonuses is won and no other combination is won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. In the stop control table for the right reel that is created regardless of the display result of the already stopped reels, the “replay / cherry / blue 7” of the 9th to 12th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers is displayed. When the number of drawn frames to be specified is determined and the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” of symbols 9 to 12 is derived as the display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one reel (1) is on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. In the stop control table for the middle reel created when the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of) is not stopped, the “cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers・ Replay cherries ”, 20, 21, when the number of frames to be drawn for which the first symbol“ Cherry Bell Cherry ”is specified is determined, and when a stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers No. 11-13 “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 20, 21, No. 1 “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as the display result and finally entered Since the winning combination will not be aligned on the line, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and one reel (1) is on the winning line of the left reel while the middle reel is still rotating. In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created when the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of) is stopped, there is one on the winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel. One area on the winning line where the “Blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel against the area number where the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) can be drawn in the range of 4 frames. When the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result indicating that the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of (1) stops is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers, the left reel The “Blue 7” symbol has stopped On the prize line, one (1) "red 7" combination constitute the symbol is displayed to stop result is derived. In addition, at least one of the region numbers different from the region number for specifying the display result of the stop of the “red 7” symbol on the winning line where the “blue 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel is set. On the other hand, the number of frames to be drawn for which “Cherry Replay Cherry” of No. 11 to No. 13 and No. 21 and No. 1 of “Cherry Bell Cherry” are specified is determined. When a reel stop operation is detected, any of “Cherry Replay Cherries” of No. 11 to No. 13 and No. 20, 21, No. 1 of “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as a display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  In other words, when only one (1) is elected, at least one left (1) is on the winning line of the left reel while at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. In the case where the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination is stopped, the region number for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye and the region number for identifying the display result constituting one (1) combination are obtained. A different stop control table is created.

  When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. ) Is not stopped, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, one on the winning line of the middle reel ( In the stop control table for the right reel created when the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of 1) is not stopped, the “9” symbol “12” described above for at least one of the area numbers is included. If the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, the “Replay / Cherry / Blue” is displayed. "It is derived as a result display, since the winning combination to finally pay line will not be aligned, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel (2) is already on the winning line of the left reel with the left reel already stopped and the middle reel still rotating. In the middle reel stop control table created when the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of) are not stopped, the “cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols described above for at least one of the area numbers・ Replay cherries ”, 20, 21, when the number of frames to be drawn for which the first symbol“ Cherry Bell Cherry ”is specified is determined, and when a stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers No. 11-13 “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 20, 21, No. 1 “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as the display result and finally entered Since the winning combination will not be aligned on the line, so that the chance eyes is established.

  When only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel (2) is already on the winning line of the left reel with the left reel already stopped and the middle reel still rotating. In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created when the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes the combination is stopped, there is one on the winning line where the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel. One area on the winning line where the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel, against the area number that can draw the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of (2) in the range of 4 frames. When the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result of “Blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of (2) is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the middle reel is detected at the timing of these area numbers, the left reel "Red 7" symbol is stopped On the prize line, one (2) "Blue 7" symbol is stopped and displayed a result of the combination constitutes a is derived. In addition, at least one of the region numbers different from the region number for specifying the display result of the stop of the “blue 7” symbol on the winning line where the “red 7” symbol is stopped on the left reel is set. On the other hand, the number of frames to be drawn for which “Cherry Replay Cherry” of No. 11 to No. 13 and No. 21 and No. 1 of “Cherry Bell Cherry” are specified is determined. When a reel stop operation is detected, any of “Cherry Replay Cherries” of No. 11 to No. 13 and No. 20, 21, No. 1 of “Cherry Bell Cherry” is derived as a display result, Eventually, there will be no winning combination on the winning line, so a chance will be established.

  In other words, if only one (2) is elected, at least one left (2) is on the winning line of the left reel while at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. When the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination is stopped, the area number for specifying the display result constituting the chance eye and the area number for identifying the display result constituting one (2) combination are displayed. A different stop control table is created.

  When only one (2) is won in the normal gaming state, at least one left reel is already stopped and at least one left (2) on the winning line of the left reel while the right reel is still rotating. ) Is not stopped, or at least the middle reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, one on the winning line of the middle reel ( In the stop control table for the right reel created when the “blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of 2) is not stopped, the “9-7” symbol “ If the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” is specified is determined, and the stop operation of the right reel is detected at the timing of this area number, the “Replay / Cherry / Blue” is displayed. "It is derived as a result display, since the winning combination to finally pay line will not be aligned, so that the chance eyes is established.

  The middle reel stop control table created when none of the winning combinations is won in the normal gaming state shows the numbers 11 to 13 for any area number regardless of the display result of the already stopped reels. The number of draw-in frames for which display results other than the symbols “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 20, 21 and 1 “Cherry Bell Cherry” are specified is determined. In the stop control table for the right reel that is created when the winning combination is not selected, the lead-in frame for which display results other than “Replay / Cherry / Blue 7” of the 9th to 12th symbols are specified for any area number. Since the number is fixed, there is no chance that the chance will be finalized.

  In addition, when any bonus is won in the normal game state and any other combination is not won, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating. In the middle reel stop control table created in the normal game state, when only one (1) or one (2) is elected, at least the left reel has already stopped and the middle reel is still In the stop control table for the middle reel that is created in the rotating state, the “cherry replay cherry” of Nos. 11 to 13 described above for the specific area number, Nos. 20, 21, and 1 are used. Created when the number of draws that specify “Cherry Bell Cherry” in the design is fixed, but in the normal game state no role is won In the middle reel stop control table, the 11th to 13th symbols "Cherry Replay Cherry", 20, 21, and the 1st symbol "Cherry Bell Cherry" are stored in the specified area number. The number of frames for which the display result is specified is determined. Therefore, when the bonus or one (1), one (2) is won, the middle reel stop operation is performed at the timing of the specific area number, and the display result constituting the chance eye On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, even if the middle reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  In addition, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. When the right reel stop control table is created in the normal gaming state, only one (1) or one (2) is elected, and at least one of the reels is already stopped. In the stop control table for the right reel that is created when the right reel is still rotating, the “replay / cherry / blue 7” of the 9th to 12th symbols described above for the specific area number are used. The number of draws to be specified is determined, whereas in the normal gaming state, no role is won and at least one reel is already The stop control table for the right reel, which is created when the right reel is still rotating, shows the “replay cherry cherry” of the 9th to 12th symbols for the specific area number described above. The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than “Blue 7” is specified is determined. For this reason, when the bonus or one (1), one (2) is won, the right reel stop operation is performed at the timing of the specific area number, and the display result constituting the chance eye On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, even if the right reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  Next, the symbol arrangement on the left reel will be described with reference to FIG. 2. The 9th “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus, 1 (2) is the upper stage of the left reel, Display modes (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stop at either the middle or lower level, the combination of the big bonus (2) and the combination of one (1) number 16 and 18 The display mode (region numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) in which the “Blue 7” symbol of the number stops at any of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel Each is arranged beyond the maximum drawing range of 4 frames.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 9 to 13) at which the 9th “red 7” symbol can be drawn on a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line, You can draw the 16th “Blue 7” symbol up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line, or you can draw the 18th “Blue 7” symbol up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be played, the “red 7” symbol of No. 9 is drawn up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line I can't do that either. In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Red 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. The Big Bonus (1), Regular Bonus (1), 1 piece (in the position where the “Red 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing the stop operation is performed within the range that can be pulled up. Since the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of 2) and the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and the combination of one (1) are respectively arranged, “red 7” "There is no stop operation position that can aim at the" blue 7 "symbol at the same time.

  In other words, in the left reel stop control table created when the big bonus (2) or one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, the “Blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line. Created when the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of display frames to be drawn are determined and the big bonus (1) or regular bonus, 1 (2) are won in the normal gaming state. In the stop control table for the left reel, the “Red 7” symbol is different from the region numbers 9 to 15 in which the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “Red 7” symbol stops on any winning line is different. There is no stop operation position at which the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state, a display mode (No. 6 “cherry” symbols constituting a combination of cherries from which more medals are paid out than one (1) stops at one of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel. Area number 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and the 16th or 18th “blue 7” symbol that composes one (1) is on the upper, middle, or lower level of the left reel. The display modes (area numbers 14 to 16, 15 to 17, 16 to 18, 17 to 19, and 18 to 20) to be stopped are arranged so as to exceed the maximum drawing range of 4 frames.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 12, the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (region numbers 6 to 12) where the 6th “cherry” symbol can be drawn and stopped on any of the pay lines. If this is done, you can pull in the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design up to 4 frames and stop it on one of the winning lines, or the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design up to 4 frames. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be pulled in and stopped on any of the winning lines, a maximum of 4 frames of the “Cherry” symbol is displayed. It cannot be pulled in and stopped on any winning line. In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Cherry” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. In the normal gaming state, more medals are paid out to a position where the “Cherry” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing within the range that can be withdrawn. Since the “Cherry” symbol No. 6 constituting the cherry combination and the “Blue 7” symbol constituting one (1) combination are arranged, the “Cherry” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol are arranged respectively. There is no stop operation position that can aim at the same time.

  In other words, in the stop control table for the left reel created when the cherry is won in the normal gaming state, the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “cherry” symbol stops on one of the winning lines is determined. In the stop control table of the left reel created when the area numbers 6 to 12 and one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, a display indicating that the “blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line Since the region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of frames into which the mode is drawn are different are different, there is no stop operation position that can simultaneously aim at the “cherry” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol.

  On the other hand, the display pattern (area number 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and chance chance that the 6th “cherry” symbol stops at the upper, middle or lower level of the left reel The “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are arranged within the maximum drawing range of 4 frames. Further, as shown in FIG. 12, a stop operation position (region numbers 6 to 12) in which the number of draw-in frames for drawing 6 “cherry” symbols up to 4 frames and stopping them on any winning line is determined, and The number of draws to stop the “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2-4th symbol and the “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th-10th symbols, which constitutes the chance at the time of winning one (1), is determined. Since the stop operation positions (region numbers 4 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 14) partially overlap, the stop operation positions (region numbers 6 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 12) are stopped. If an operation is made, if the cherries are won, the 6th “cherry” symbol will stop on one of the winning lines, and if one is won (1), the chance will be configured "Replay Watermelon Bell" with 2-4 symbols, 8 "Bell red 7 Bell" of the No. 10 pattern is to be stopped.

  Next, error control associated with medal payout will be described. The CPU 41a performs a control for driving out the hopper motor 34 and paying out medals in accordance with the occurrence of the small role winning and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting the bet amount). At this time, if medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are clogged, the driving of the hopper motor 34 is stopped, and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time despite the hopper motor 34 being driven, the hopper motor 34 is stopped once and the hopper motor 34 is restarted several times. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even after the trial, it is determined as a hopper error (an error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper), and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. The error states associated with these medal jamming errors and hopper errors are canceled by operating the reset switch 23 and the reset / setting switch 38, and control for paying out the remaining medals is performed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into important work, general work, special work, set value work 1 to 3, non-saved work, unused area, and stack area.

  The important work is a work that stores data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. The general work is a work in which data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus, are stored. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work 1 is a work in which a set value used when performing lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before the transition to the setting change mode), 1 is set. The setting value newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored. The set value work 2 is a set value used when determining whether or not the set value read from the set value work 1 when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process matches the set value stored at the end of the setting. Is stored, and the setting value newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored. The set value work 3 is whether or not the set value read from the set value work 1 when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process matches the set value used when the lottery is performed in the internal lottery process of the previous game. This is a work for storing the setting value used when determining whether the setting value of the previous game, that is, the setting value newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored. When a lottery is performed in the internal lottery process for each game, the value is updated to the value read from the set value work 1. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is satisfied by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 has four data at the end of one game when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed before the start of setting (before the transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, and at the time of activation. When the initialization condition consisting of is established, four types of initializations with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed before the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and shifts to the setting change mode. All areas except the middle stack area (including unused areas and unused stack areas) are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is initialization that is performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  Next, an external output signal output from the slot machine 1 to an external device will be described. The CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 pays out in response to the occurrence of a regular bonus, an RB signal indicating the big bonus, a BB signal indicating the big bonus, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, and winning. Output control for outputting a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals as an external output signal. As shown in FIG. 13, the game control board 40 can be connected to an external device via the external output board 110, and an external output signal output by the output control of the CPU 41 a is connected to the external output board 110. Output to external devices.

  FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing the output status of the RB signal and BB signal when the big bonus occurs.

  When a big bonus occurs, the CPU 41a first starts outputting a BB signal (from OFF to ON). Next, during the big bonus that starts the output of the RB signal with the occurrence of the regular bonus (from OFF to ON), the transition to the regular bonus is repeated until the end condition is satisfied, so it is always controlled to the regular bonus. However, as shown in FIG. 14, when the regular bonus is once ended and the next regular bonus is started, the CPU 41a stops outputting the RB signal indicating the occurrence of the regular bonus to be ended ( When the output waiting time tw elapses, the output is started again (from OFF to ON). When the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied and the regular bonus ends with this, the output of the RB signal is stopped (from the ON state to the OFF state), and then the output of the BB signal is also stopped (ON) To OFF state).

  Thus, when the regular bonus ends during the big bonus and the regular bonus starts again, the output of the RB signal is stopped for the output waiting time tw, and then the output is started again. It is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by the external device that has input the RB signal. Note that the output waiting time tw may be a time longer than the time at which the external device 5 can determine that the signal has been interrupted.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 gives a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a status command, standby command, stop command, error command, setting start command, initialization command, and power-on command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start lever 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game (whether it is a normal gaming state, a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.), and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and is transmitted when the transition to the standby state is made after a certain time has elapsed without setting the bet amount after the end of one game.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting is started, that is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on, and if it can be restored to the state before the power interruption at startup, it returns to the state before the power interruption. Sent at a time before

  Each of these commands is generated in an activation process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 receives a command transmitted by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, and displays the liquid crystal display based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. Various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are controlled.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. The control device corresponding to the type of the command is referred to, and the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the CPU 91a receives a new command during the execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and performs control corresponding to the newly received command. An effect based on the pattern is executed. In other words, even when the effect has not been completed to the end, when a new command is received, the effect that has been executed is canceled and the effect based on the new command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table also includes specific commands (reel stop command, winning determination command indicating the occurrence of winning, payout start command, payout end, gaming state command indicating big bonus end, standby command, stop command, error command. , A setting start command, an initialization command, a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, etc.) are stored, and the CPU 91a receives the specific command. Regardless of the effect pattern set in the game, a specific control pattern corresponding to the command is referred to and the effect device is controlled based on the control pattern.

  When a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a winning is received, a winning effect pattern for executing a winning effect according to the type of winning is referred to as a control pattern. In particular, when a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a big bonus winning is received, a BB winning pattern for executing a BB winning effect peculiar to the big bonus winning is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a payout start command is received, a payout pattern for outputting payout sound effects is referred to as a control pattern. Further, when a payout end command is received during the output of the payout sound effect, the output of the payout sound effect is stopped. Note that when a payout start command is received, unlike the other commands, the effect being executed is not executed and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed. Sound effects are output. That is, other effects and effects accompanying payout are executed in parallel.

  When a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received, an ending pattern for executing an ending effect indicating the end of the big bonus is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a standby pattern for executing a standby effect as a demonstration effect is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when a continuous effect or an additional effect, which will be described later, is being executed, and when an effect accompanying a big bonus or a regular bonus is being executed, the execution of the standby effect is prohibited. Even if the standby command is received in such a state, the standby pattern is not referred to as the control pattern, and the standby effect is not executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the standby effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning. As will be described later, the above-mentioned BB winning effect and ending effect are in the progress stage where the effect is dynamically executed, and at the time when the progress stage ends (for example, the liquid crystal display 51 has a final screen). Is continuously displayed and the final stage sound effect is repeatedly output), and the BB winning effect and ending effect reach the final stage when an error occurs. In such a case, when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect and the ending effect are not executed from the elapsed stage, but return to the final stage.

  When the setting start command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the initialization command is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as the control pattern. That is, when the initialization command is received, the standby effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special role is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special role has won.

  The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 performs RAM parity adjustment so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0 each time the timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed is executed. Data is calculated and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and is based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. It is designed to return to the production state before the interruption. Specifically, the control pattern executed last is referred to and control based on the control pattern is executed. As a result, an effect based on the control pattern executed before power interruption is executed from the beginning. If the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage at the time of power interruption, the BB winning effect or ending effect is not executed from the elapsed stage at the next start-up, but the final stage state. It will return to. Further, when the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup is not 0 (in the case of 1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized. It has become.

  In addition, the CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the production regardless of whether or not the production state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation. Wait until either is received. If the initialization command is received in this state, the standby effect is executed after clearing the data in the RAM 91c. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the effect state before the power interruption, it returns, and if it cannot be recovered, the standby effect is executed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted, and even when other commands are received, An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until an initialization command or a power-on command is received after the startup and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  In addition, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 continuously executes over a plurality of games in the normal gaming state, and finally executes a continuous effect that notifies whether or not the bonus is won.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the flow of continuous production.
As shown in FIG. 15, every time the CPU 91a receives an internal winning command in the normal gaming state, that is, every time an internal lottery is performed, the CPU 91a continuously determines whether to execute a continuous effect according to the result of the internal lottery. When the production lottery is executed and the continuous production lottery is won, one continuous production pattern is selected from a plurality of continuous production patterns according to the result of the internal lottery, and the continuous production is performed based on the selected continuous production pattern. Execute. On the other hand, even if the continuous effect lottery is not won, if the chance stops, one of the multiple continuous effect patterns is selected and selected according to the result of the internal lottery of the game. A continuous effect is executed based on the continuous effect pattern.

  In addition, when the chance eyes are stopped during the execution of the continuous performance, the chance eyes are invalidated and the continuous performance is not newly executed. Further, after winning one of the bonuses, the continuous effect is executed even once, and when the bonus is announced, the continuous effect lottery is not performed thereafter. That is, after winning one of the bonuses, the continuous effect is executed even once, and when the bonus is announced, the continuous effect is not further executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the continuous performance is executed when the chance chance is derived in the normal gaming state and the RT. In addition, the continuous effect lottery is executed in each game in the normal gaming state, and the continuous effect is also executed when winning the continuous effect lottery. That is, in the normal gaming state, even if the chance is not derived, if the continuous production lottery is won, the continuous production is executed.

  Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the setting of bets and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting bets) and effects. 16 to 25 are timing charts showing a period during which the setting of the bet number is allowed and a period during which the credit settlement is allowed.

  As shown in FIG. 16, while the game is not being executed, the setting of the bet number and the credit settlement are permitted. In this state, the bet number is set by inserting a medal or using the credit. Settings are controlled to be possible. If a bet number can be set and a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state is not set, the bet number is incremented by one each time a medal is detected. Further, if a prescribed number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, a credit is added by one each time a medal is detected. When the credit reaches the upper limit (50 sheets in the present embodiment), the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the insertion of the medal is prohibited. The If the credits remain, the number of bets is set according to these switches by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, and the amount is subtracted from the credits. Further, if the credits remain or the bet number is set, the operation of the settlement switch 10 is used to set the medal and the bet amount stored as credits by driving the hopper motor 34. The given amount of medals is paid out and returned to the player, and credits and bets are subtracted according to the medals paid out.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are permitted, and the game is started, the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are prohibited at that time. Specifically, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the operation of the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the settlement switch 10 is invalidated. The time when the game is started is not the time when the rotation of the reel is started, but the time when the start switch 7 is operated and the control stage is shifted. This is because although a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, there is a case where a weight is applied. At this point, the game starts as a control stage although the reel rotation is on standby.

  Thereafter, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When the display result is derived, it is determined that the game has ended, and when the end of the game is determined, the setting of the bet amount and the prohibition of credit settlement are lifted, and the setting of the bet amount and credit settlement are permitted. It becomes a state. As an exception, when a replay win occurs, the bet number is automatically set, so setting of the bet number by the player's operation remains prohibited. Credit settlement is also prohibited.

  As a result of stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, if a winning with a medal payout has occurred, display results are derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as shown in FIG. At the time, the end of the game is not determined, and when the medal payout accompanying the occurrence of the winning is completed, the end of the game is determined, and at that time, the setting of the bet amount and the prohibition of the credit settlement are canceled, and the bet Number setting and credit settlement are permitted.

  Also, if the big bonus winning is generated as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R being stopped, as shown in FIG. 18, when the display results are derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, Is determined to be completed, and the CPU 91a executes the BB winning effect. The stage at the BB winning stage is composed of an elapsed stage and a final stage. First, when the stage shifts to the stage where the dynamic stage is executed over the stage time of the stage at the BB winning stage, the stage is completed. The process moves to the final stage where the state continues. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and this elapsed time is set longer than the period until the above-mentioned BB winning effect is reached at the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the time effect stage waiting time is reached, and the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the stage waiting time for the BB winning effect. Thus, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, after the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred is determined, the elapsed time that is counted by the CPU 41a until reaching the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. That is, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect at the time of power interruption, and at the next start-up, the BB winning effect effect is based on the backed up counter value. Since the waiting time is restarted, the time (Tb period in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the interruption from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect is restored when the interruption is restored. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, when a power interruption occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. Is done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, when a power interruption occurs at the stage after the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and then returns, the BB winning effect returns to the final stage. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, a flag indicating that the BB winning effect has reached the final stage or the BB winning effect) (Elapsed time since the execution of BB) is backed up, and at the next start-up, it is backed up that the effect at the time of BB winning is in an elapsed stage (for example, the fact that the effect at the time of BB winning has reached the final stage When the flag is set or when the time elapsed since the execution of the BB winning effect has reached the final stage), the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and the BB winning effect is performed. If the fact that is in the final stage is backed up, the BB winning effect will return to the final stage. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21, after the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred is determined, the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a until the stage waiting time for the BB winning effect is reached. If a payment error occurs during the payment of credits and a payout error occurs during the payment of the medal associated with the payment, the time elapsed since the end of the game is determined to be an error. Resume from the state of time. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect even during the error occurrence, and after canceling the error, the BB winning effect based on the maintained counter value. When the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) is removed when the payout error is canceled. When the period of (medium Td) elapses, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in an elapsed stage. It is executed from the beginning. On the other hand, although not particularly illustrated, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the BB winning effect has reached the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the BB winning effect is at the final stage as in the case of power interruption. It returns in the state of. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data only on whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of an error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It will return in the state of. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  In addition, in the game during the big bonus, as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R being stopped, the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, some wins occur and the total number of payouts during the big bonus reaches 466 If the game is a game and the stop function is not set, as shown in FIG. 18, the end of the game is determined at the time when the payout of medals is completed, and the ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a. . The ending effect is composed of an elapsed stage and a final stage, as in the case of the BB winning effect. First, a transition is made to an elapsed stage in which a dynamic effect is executed over the effect time of the ending effect. When is finished, the process proceeds to the final stage where the state is continued. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the waiting time is reached, and the number of bets is set when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the ending effect production waiting time. The prohibition is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, the period until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time for the ending effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. In other words, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the ending effect production waiting time at the time of power interruption, and at the next activation, measures the ending effect production waiting time based on the counter value that is backed up. Therefore, when power is restored, the bet is made when the time (Tb in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed. The prohibition of the setting of the number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, when a power interruption occurs in a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, after the flag or ending effect indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is executed). (Elapsed time) is backed up, and the next time it is activated, it is backed up that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage (for example, when the flag indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is set or the ending effect) If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, the ending effect is It will return in the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined, the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a is until the BB winning stage effect waiting time is reached. For example, if a credit checkout is executed and a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with the checkout, and the payout error is canceled, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is counted. Resume from the state when the error occurred. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the ending effect stage waiting time even during the occurrence of an error, and after the error is released, the ending effect stage waiting time is based on the maintained counter value. Therefore, when the payout error is canceled, the time (Td period in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) from the production waiting time of the ending effect is released. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. That is, the sub-control unit 91 maintains only data indicating whether the ending effect being executed is in the elapsed stage or the final stage when the error occurs, and when the error is canceled, the data indicating that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage If the ending effect is maintained, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and if the data indicating that the ending effect is in the final stage is maintained, the ending effect returns to the final stage state. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  Further, if the big bonus end condition is satisfied and the stop function is set, as shown in FIG. 22, the end of the game is determined at the time when the medal payout is ended. The above-mentioned ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. Since the stop state is controlled when the waiting time is reached, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated even when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the rendering waiting time of the ending effect. Until the bet is set, the setting of the bet number remains prohibited. When the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the setting of the bet number is also released. The bet number setting is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, a period until the elapsed time measured by the CPU 41 a reaches the effect waiting time for the ending effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. That is, at the time of restoration of power interruption, after a time (period Tf in the figure) excluding time (period Te in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or reset / When the setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when a power interruption occurs in a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 25, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, it is determined that the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time for the BB winning effect. For example, if a credit checkout is executed and a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with the checkout, and the payout error is canceled, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is counted. Resume from the state when the error occurred. That is, when the payout error is canceled, after the time (time period Tg in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tg in the figure) from the rendering waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and when the batting state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the end condition of the big bonus is that the total number of payouts in the big bonus reaches 466. Therefore, in a game in which the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied, the medal must be paid out. The end of the game will be determined when the payout is completed. For example, when the big bonus reaches the specified number of games as an end condition, the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied. In some cases, the game does not involve paying out medals. In such a case, the end of the game is determined when the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs the startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 41a is activated due to a malfunction. Processing to be performed.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and when the voltage drop signal is input, any processing other than the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input is performed. There is no loop processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal has not been input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), and the states of the stop switch 36 and the automatic settlement switch 29 are acquired, Validity / invalidity of the stop function and automatic settlement function is set in a specific register of the CPU 41a (Sa4). By initialization of the I register and the IY register, an interrupt table address to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and a reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sa6, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa7). Is determined (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing (main) is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If power interruption interrupt processing (main) is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set, and if the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (data for destruction diagnosis is power interruption) Since the data in the RAM 41c is not normal even in cases other than 5A (H) stored sometimes, the error code indicating the RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 27, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). .

  Next, the error code stored in the register is checked to determine whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error (Sb3). After initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas except the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c (Sb4), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code is not an error other than a RAM abnormality error, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 has been detected (Sb5), and the reset / setting switch. If the operation of 38 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sb6). If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, the process returns to the step Sb5. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb5 or when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step Sb6, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sb7 ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state saved in the stack in the step Sb1 (Sb8), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormality error, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated to return to the original processing even if the error state is canceled. In the case of error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated.

  Returning to FIG. 26, if it is determined in step Sa9 that the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the unstored work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After initialization 3 is performed (Sa11), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa12). Next, it is determined whether any special role is won in the state before the power interruption (Sa13). If any special role is elected in the state before the power interruption, the special role is determined. The power-on command indicating the winning of the special role is set (Sa14), and the process proceeds to the step of Sa16. If no special role is won in the state before the power interruption, the power-on command indicating the non-winning of the special role is set. Set (Sa15) and proceed to the step of Sa16.

  In step Sa16, each register is restored to the state before power interruption, that is, stored in the stack, interrupt is permitted (Sa17), and the process executed last before power interruption is returned. In addition, when an interrupt is permitted in the step Sa17, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed. Accordingly, the power-on command set in the step Sa14 or Sa15 is sent to the sub-control unit 91. Sent.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in the step of Sa6, after executing initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas except the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c (Sa18), The value stored in the set value work (0 at this time) is corrected to 1 (Sa19). Next, after a setting start command is set (Sa20), interruption is permitted (Sa21), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 28, that is, the setting change mode is entered (Sa22). When the interrupt is permitted in the step Sa21, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed, and accordingly, the setting start command set in the step Sa20 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. . After the setting change process in step Sa22 is completed, an initialization command is set (Sa23), and the process proceeds to the game process. The initialization command set in step Sa23 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 28, the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process. Is read out (Sc1).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start lever 7 (Sc2, Sc3). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sc2, the set value read in the step Sc1. 1 is added (Sc4), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sc5). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the state of waiting for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start lever 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3, if the set value after addition is 7 in the step Sc5, the set value is corrected to 1 (Sc6 ), The process returns to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start lever 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3.

  When the operation of the start lever 7 is detected in the step of Sc3, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c and the set value is confirmed (Sc7). Wait until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc8). If it is determined in step Sc8 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 26, and the process proceeds to the game process.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is stored in the RAM 41c by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal. It is determined whether the stored data is normal. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the process proceeds to error processing. In the error processing due to the RAM abnormal error, an error code indicating the RAM abnormal error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, interrupts are not permitted. Therefore, once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and interrupts are permitted. Until then, power interruption interrupt processing (main) is not performed even if power is interrupted. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process (main), and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the CPU 41a is restarted, the game cannot be restarted even if the CPU 41a is restarted, except when the setting key switch 37 is started in the ON state.

  Then, once the process shifts to an error process due to a RAM abnormality error, the setting key switch 37 is activated in an ON state, and after all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, a setting change process is performed. The game cannot be progressed until a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where a bet number can be set, and a process of determining a bet number when a specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state and the start lever 7 is operated is executed. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start lever 7 in step Sd1, and the above winning combinations are allowed based on the extracted random number value. Processing to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined in step Sd4 that a winning has occurred, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed. In the game end process, RT processing for performing control related to RT is also performed.

  30 and 31 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se1), and the specified number according to the gaming state (the specified number of betting numbers determined according to the gaming state. In the regular bonus, 1 is set. In the normal gaming state, 3 is set.) Is set in the RAM 41c (Se2), and a replay game flag indicating that the game is a replay game is set in the RAM 41c. Whether or not the game is a replay game is determined based on whether or not it is played (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se4), the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the BET counter is It is determined whether or not the number is a prescribed number (Se5), and if the value of the BET counter is not the prescribed number, the process returns to the step of Se4. The RAM 41c is set (Se6), and the process proceeds to the Se8 step.

  If it is determined that the game is not a replay game in the step of Se3, the setting before waiting for input is performed (Se7), and the process proceeds to the step of Se8. In the setting before waiting for input, the input disable flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared, and the detection of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is validated.

  In step Se8, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c. When it is determined in step Se8 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side. If it is determined that the medal can not be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the off state, and the medal flow path is the path on the medal payout exit 9 side. As a result, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se10), and the process proceeds to Step Se11.

  In step Se11, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in the step of Se11, the process proceeds to the step of Se18. If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the insertion of the medal is performed based on whether or not the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is possible to enter the token (Se12). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to Step Se18.

  If the medal can be inserted in the step of Se12, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to determine whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se13). If the value is not the specified number, 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se14), and the process returns to the Se8 step.

  If the value of the BET counter is a prescribed number in the step of Se13, 1 is added to the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c (Se15), and whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the credit counter is 50, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c (Se17), and the process returns to the step of Se8. .

  In step Se18, it is determined whether an operation of the start switch 7 is detected. If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step of Se18, the process proceeds to the step of Se22. If the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se19).

  If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number in the step of Se19, the process returns to the step of Se8, and if the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the input impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c and the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off. The state is set, the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side, insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se20), and the setting at the start of the game is performed (Se21). In the setting at the start of the game, detection of operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 is invalidated. Then, after the step of Se21, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, setting of bets based on the insertion of medals, detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is prohibited, and the adjustment of credits based on the detection of the operation of the adjustment switch 10 is prohibited. It becomes. Note that the insertion impossible flag is not cleared until the BET process of the next game, and the detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is not cleared until the BET process of the next game. The bet number setting is prohibited until the BET process. In addition, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not cleared until the next game BET processing except when the big bonus is won or the big bonus is ended. (Including medals used for setting) are prohibited. When the big bonus is won or the big bonus is over, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is effective when the game is finished (when the reel is stopped or when the medal payout is finished) without waiting for the BET process of the next game. Credits can be settled.

  In the step of Se22, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected. If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is not detected in the step of Se22, the process proceeds to the step of Se27, and if the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Se23). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se23, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se24). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se24, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se25), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se26), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

  In step Se27, it is determined whether or not an operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se27, the process proceeds to the step of Se32, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the BET counter It is determined whether the value of is a specified number (Se28). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se28, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se29). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se29, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se30), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se31), and the process returns to the step of Se28.

  In the step of Se32, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se32, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the operation is based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se33). If the game is a replay game, the process returns to step Se8. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se33, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se34). If the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to the step of Se36, and the value of the BET counter is 0. Otherwise, a bet amount settlement flag indicating that the already set bet amount is to be settled is set in the RAM 41c (Se35), and the process proceeds to the step of Se36. In step Se36, the hopper motor 34 is driven to pay out medals corresponding to the value stored in the credit counter or BET counter, that is, medals stored as credits or medals used for setting the number of bets. Checkout processing is performed in which the return control is performed. Then, after the settlement process in the step of Se36, the input impossible flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se37), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the settlement process executed by the CPU 41a.
In the settlement process, first, it is determined whether or not the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled based on whether or not the bet amount settlement flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sf1).

  If the medal used for setting the bet amount in the step of Sf1 is not settled, it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf2). If the value of the credit counter is 0, the settlement process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the original process.

  If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Sf2, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side. Insertion is prohibited (Sf3), and one medal payout process is performed to control payout of one medal (Sf4).

  In the medal payout process in step Sf4, if the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is not on, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to on. Then, the detection state of the payout sensor 35 is monitored, and when the payout sensor 35 detects the payout of one medal, it is determined that the medal is paid out, and the process proceeds to the next process. Further, when medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are jammed, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off, and an error code indicating a medal jammed error is set in the register. After that, the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is once turned off, and no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even if the driving of the hopper motor 34 is retried several times. In this case, after an error code indicating a hopper error (an error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper) is set in the register, the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. The error processing due to the medal jamming error or the hopper error is canceled by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38, and after the cancellation, the processing returns to the top of the single medal payout processing.

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf4, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1 (Sf5), and it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf6). If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in step Sf6, the process returns to step Sf4. If the value of the credit counter is 0, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the driving is stopped. Later (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  If it is the settlement of medals used for setting the number of bets in the step of Sf1, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set to the medal payout exit. As a route on the 9th side, insertion of medals is prohibited (Sf3), and the same medal payout process as in step Sf4 is performed (Sf9).

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf9, the value of the BET counter is decremented by 1 (Sf10), and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Sf11). If the value of the BET counter is not 0 in the step of Sf11, the process returns to the step of Sf9. If the value of the BET counter is 0, the betting number settlement flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sf12). After the drive state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the drive is stopped (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process, a random number acquisition process is performed (Sg1). In this random number acquisition process, a random number value for internal lottery is acquired based on the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42.

  In the random number acquisition process, as shown in FIG. 34, interrupts are first prohibited (Sg21). Next, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the value of the latched random number is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. The random number value extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41G (Sg22).

  Next, the lower byte value and upper byte value of the random number stored in the general-purpose register 41G are exchanged with each other using the register for circle calculation (Sg23). Next, the value of the random number stored in the general-purpose register 41G is ORed with 8080h (Sg24). Further, the upper byte (15th to 8th bits) is shifted downward by 1 bit, and 1 is inserted into the empty 15th bit. At this time, the value stored in the general-purpose register 41G is acquired as a random number for internal lottery (Sf25). Then, after permitting the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sg21 (Sg26), the random number acquisition process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 33, after the random number acquisition process in the step of Sg2, the setting values stored in the setting value works 1 to 3 of the RAM 41c are read out and stored in the setting value used for the lottery, that is, the setting value work 1. A set value determination process is performed to determine whether or not the set value is appropriate (Sg2).

  In the set value determination process, as shown in FIG. 35, a set value determination process 1 (Sg51), a set value determination process 2 (Sg52), and a set value determination process 3 (Sg53) are sequentially executed.

  In the set value determination process 1 in the step of Sg51, as shown in FIG. 36, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game is appropriate. It is determined whether or not the value is within the range (Sg61). If the value read from the set value work 1 is not within the range of 1 to 6, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg62). If the value read from the set value work 1 is a value in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to the set value determination process 2 in step Sg52.

  In the set value determination process 2 in the step of Sg52, as shown in FIG. 37, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 match, that is, the current game. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery matches the set value set at the previous setting change (Sg71), and the value read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 2 If the values do not match, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg72), the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 27, and the values read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 2 If the value matches, the process proceeds to the set value determination process 3 in step Sg53.

  In the set value determination processing 3 in the step of Sg53, as shown in FIG. 38, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match, that is, the current game. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game (Sg81), and the value read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 3 If the two values do not match, the error code indicating the RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg82), the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 27, and the value read from the set value work 1 and the set value work 3 If the read value matches, the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the setting value determination process, whether or not the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game is within an appropriate range, whether the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the previous setting change are set. By determining whether or not the set value matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game, respectively. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery of the game is an appropriate value, and if it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate value in at least one of the determinations, the above-described RAM abnormality error In the same manner as when the data in the RAM 41c is determined not to be normal at the time of startup, an error state due to a RAM abnormality error occurs, and the progress of the game is disabled. It has become as to be.

  Returning to FIG. 33, if the set value is appropriate in the set value determination process in the step of Sg2, the value stored in the set value work 3, that is, the set value used for the lottery in the previous game is set to the set value 1. The stored value, that is, the set value used for the lottery in the current game is updated (Sg3).

  Next, in accordance with the current gaming state, the combinations registered as targets for internal lottery in the gaming state-specific combination table of FIG. 6A are sequentially read (Sg4). It is determined whether or not the type of the read role is a regular bonus, a big bonus (1), or a big bonus (2) (Sg5). When the type of the combination read in the step of Sg5 is a regular bonus, a big bonus (1) or a big bonus (2), the type of the combination read to the RAM 41c in the previous game is the regular bonus, big bonus (1 ) Or a big bonus (2) winning flag has already been set, and it is determined whether or not it has been carried over without winning based on the winning flag (Sg6). If the type of the read combination is not the regular bonus, the big bonus (1), or the big bonus (2), the process proceeds to step Sg7 as it is.

  If the winning flag for the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) has already been set in the step of Sg6, the process returns to the step of Sg4 and further reads the next registered combination in the gaming state-specific combination table. (Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2) are first registered in the gaming state-specific combination table, and the lottery process will not be terminated by this). Even if the type of the read combination is regular bonus, big bonus (1) or big bonus (2), if any winning flag of regular bonus, big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is not set , Go to Sg7 step.

  In the step of Sg7, the number of BETs (number of bets) set in the step of Sd1 is further read, and the combination corresponding to the number of BETs read in the step of Sg4 and the number of BETs is shared in the role-specific table of FIG. Get the setting status of. As a result, it is determined whether or not the common flag is set for the read combination and number of BETs (Sg8).

  If the common flag is set, the number of determination values stored in the address registered in the role-specific table of FIG. 6B is acquired for the read role and BET number (Sg9). And it progresses to the step of Sg11. If the common flag is not set, the number of determination values stored in the address registered in the role-specific table corresponding to the set value is acquired for the read combination and BET number (Sg10). And it progresses to the step of Sg11.

  In the step of Sg11, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg9 or Sg10 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is used as a new random number value for internal lottery. Here, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the random number for internal lottery (Sg12). When an overflow occurs in the step of Sg12, the winning flag of the combination is set in the RAM 41c (Sg13). Then, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If no overflow has occurred in the step of Sg12, it is determined whether or not there is a combination that has not yet been processed among the combinations determined for the internal lottery for the gaming state of the game (Sg14). If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to Sg4, and the process continues with the next combination registered in the gaming state-specific combination table being processed. If there is no combination not to be processed, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Si1), and the wait time has elapsed. If not, wait until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in the Si1 step, a new wait time is set (Si2).

  Next, the setting at the time of starting the rotation of the reel motor is performed, and the rotation of the reel is started (Si3). Then, referring to the table index, the table creation data is specified, and the stop control table corresponding to the game state of the game, the winning combination status of the game, and the stop status of other reels based on the specified table creation data Is created for each rotating reel (Si4), and the setting at the time of completion of stop preparation is made (Si5). As a result, the stop operation can be validated, and then the stop operation becomes effective when the constant speed rotation of the reel is detected in the timer interruption process (main), which will be described later, when the origin passes. It becomes.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an operation of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is detected (Si6). If no operation of any stop switch is detected, a reel rotation error (over a certain period of time). Then, it is determined whether or not an error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 (Si7). If no reel rotation error has occurred, an insertion error (medal insertion) is further performed. Whether or not a medal insertion was detected outside the permitted period, and whether or not a payout error (medal payout was detected outside the medal payout period) Error) is determined (Si8, Si9), and any error occurs in steps Si7 to Si9. Even if it is not determined, the flow returns to step Si6.

  Further, when it is determined that a loading error has occurred in the Si8 step, or when a dispensing error is determined in the Si9 step, an error code indicating a loading / dispensing error during reel rotation is set in the register (Si10 ), And shifts to the error processing shown in FIG. 27 (Si11). When the error is released, the process returns to the Si6 step again.

  If it is determined in step Si7 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Si12), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 27 (Si13). Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the Si3 step again and the reel rotation is resumed.

  If any stop switch operation is detected in the Si6 step, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch is calculated. After obtaining and setting the workpiece corresponding to the stop reel (Si14), the process waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops (Si15).

  When the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop operation stops, it is determined whether or not all the reels have stopped (Si16). If all the reels have not stopped, the process returns to the Si4 step, and all the reels are If it has stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the reel rotation processing, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected is continued until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control for stopping the display result on the corresponding reel is performed. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected by continuing the rotation of the reels that have not been operated.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning determination process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd4.

  In the winning determination process, first, a stop symbol is referred to for each winning line (Sj1), and it is determined whether or not a combination corresponding to the gaming state is prepared (Sj2). If the combination corresponding to the gaming state is not complete in step Sj2, the process proceeds to Sj4. If the combination corresponding to the gaming state is aligned in step Sj2, a winning flag indicating the type of the combined combination is displayed. The RAM 41c is set (Sj3), and the process proceeds to step Sj4.

  In step Sj4, it is determined whether or not there is a winning line for which the winning determination has not been completed. If there is a winning line for which the winning determination has not been completed, the process returns to step Sj1 for the unprocessed winning line. If it is determined that there is no winning line for which the determination of winning is not completed, the process proceeds to step Sj5.

  In step Sj5, it is determined whether or not a combination corresponding to the gaming state is arranged on the winning line based on whether or not a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c. If there is no combination corresponding to the game state on the winning line in step Sj5, the winning determination process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. In the step Sj5, when the combination corresponding to the game state is arranged on the winning line, it is determined whether or not the combination indicated by the winning flag is replay (Sj6), and when the combination indicated by the winning flag is replay. Then, the replay game flag indicating the replay game is set in the RAM 41c (Sj7), the winning determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the winning combination indicated by the winning flag is not replayed in step Sj6, the number of bets for the game and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning combination indicated by the winning flag are set with reference to the combination table shown in FIG. (Sj8), go to step Sj9.

  In step Sj9, it is determined whether or not the combination indicated by the winning flag is a big bonus (1) or a big bonus (2). If the winning combination indicated by the winning flag in step Sj9 is neither the big bonus (1) nor the big bonus (2), the process proceeds to step Sj15, and the winning combination indicated by the winning flag in step Sj9 is the big bonus (1) or big bonus ( If 2), the big bonus medium flag indicating the big bonus medium is set in the RAM 41c, the winning flag of the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is cleared (Sj10), and the medal in the big bonus is stored in the RAM 41c. The value of the big bonus medium payout counter in which the total number of payouts is stored is initialized (set to 0) (Sj11), and the process proceeds to step Sj12.

  In step Sj12, it is determined whether or not the combination indicated by the winning flag is a regular bonus. If the winning combination indicated by the winning flag is not a regular bonus in the step Sj12, the process proceeds to the step Sj15. The regular bonus operation start flag indicating the start of the operation is set in the RAM 41c, the regular bonus winning flag is cleared (Sj13), the value of the regular bonus game number counter in which the number of regular bonus games is stored in the RAM 41c, and the regular bonus Initializes the value of the regular bonus medium prize counter that stores the number of times the prize is won (sets the value of the regular bonus game number counter to 12 and sets the value of the regular bonus medium prize counter) To be cleared), and then (Sj14), the process proceeds to step of Sj15.

  In step Sj15, if the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c, it is cleared. Then, the winning determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game end process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd6.

  In the game end process, first, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk1). If the regular bonus flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sk5. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk1, 1 is subtracted from the value of the regular bonus game number counter, and if a win has occurred, 1 is added to the value of the regular bonus medium prize counter (Sk2). It is determined whether or not a bonus ending condition is satisfied, that is, whether or not the value of the regular bonus game number counter is 0 or the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter is 8 (Sk3). If the regular bonus end condition is not satisfied in the step of Sk3, the process proceeds to the step of Sk5. If the end condition of the regular bonus is satisfied, the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk4). ), Go to step Sk5.

  In step Sk5, it is determined whether or not the big bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus medium flag is not set in step Sk5, the process proceeds to step Sk12. If the big bonus medium flag is set, the number of medals paid out in the game is added to the value of the big bonus medium payout counter. Then, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, whether or not the value of the big bonus medium payout counter has reached 466 (Sk7). If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in step Sk7, the process proceeds to step Sk9. If the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the big bonus medium flag and the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c are set. Clear (Sk8) and proceed to Step Sk12.

  In step Sk9, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is not set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the big bonus is in effect and the regular bonus is not activated. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk9, the process proceeds to the step of Sk12. If the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk9, the regular bonus indicating that the regular bonus is in progress. A regular bonus operation start flag indicating the operation start of the flag and the regular bonus is set in the RAM 41c (Sk10), and the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus medium winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored are initialized. (Sk11), the process proceeds to step Sk12.

  In step Sk12, it is determined whether or not the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. If the RB signal is not ON in step Sk12, the process proceeds to step Sk16. If the RB signal is ON, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk13). ). When the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk13, that is, when the regular bonus is ended and the regular bonus is not resumed thereafter, the process proceeds to the step of Sk15. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sk13, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk14). When the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk14, that is, when the regular bonus is restarted during the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk15, and the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk14. If not, that is, if the regular bonus is not satisfied and the termination condition for the regular bonus is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sk16. In the step of Sk15, the RB signal is turned off and the process proceeds to the step of Sk16.

  In the step of Sk16, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus operation start flag is not set in the step of Sk16, the process proceeds to the step of Sk19. If the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk16, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, Then, the regular bonus operation start flag of the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk17), and it waits until the output waiting time of the RB signal (tw in FIG. 14) elapses (Sk18), and when the output waiting time elapses, the step of Sk19 is performed. move on.

  In step Sk19, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk19, the process proceeds to the step of Sk25. If the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk19, whether the BB medium signal of the external output signals is in an ON state or not. Is determined (Sk20). When the BB signal is ON in the step of Sk20, that is, when the big bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk25 and the BB is in progress at the step of Sk20. When the signal is not ON, that is, when the big bonus starts from the next game, the BB medium signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk21), and the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect is stored in the register. After setting (Sk22) and enabling detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 (Sk23), an effect waiting process for waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk22 elapses is performed (Sk24). And after completion | finish of an effect waiting process, it progresses to the step of Sk25.

  In the effect waiting process, as shown in FIG. 42, the effect waiting time set in the register is set in the general-purpose time counter of the RAM 41c (Sm1), and it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sm2). If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Sm4. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 32 is performed (Sm3), and then the process proceeds to step Sm4. . In step Sm3, it is determined whether or not the production waiting time set in the general-purpose time counter has elapsed. If the production waiting time has not elapsed, the process returns to step Sm2, and if the production waiting time has elapsed. Then, the production waiting process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  In the step of Sk25, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus flag is not set in the step of Sk25, the process proceeds to the step of Sk28. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sk25, whether or not the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. Is determined (Sk26). When the RB signal is ON in the step of Sk26, that is, when the regular bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the regular bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk28 and the RB is being processed in the step of Sk26. If the signal is not ON, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, the RB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk27), and the process proceeds to step S28.

  In step Sk28, it is determined whether or not the BB signal in the external output signal is in an ON state. If the BB signal is not ON in the step of Sk28, the process proceeds to the step of Sk44. If the BB signal is ON in the step of Sk28, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. Determine (Sk29). If the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk29, that is, if the big bonus is not ended, the process proceeds to the step of Sk44, and if the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk29, that is, the big bonus is ended. In this case, after the BB signal of the external output signal is turned off (Sk30), the production waiting time for the ending effect is set in the register (Sk31), and the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is enabled (Sk31). (Sk32), an effect waiting process (see FIG. 42) is performed to wait until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk31 elapses (Sk33). After completion of the effect waiting process in the step of Sk33, initialization 2 is performed to initialize the general work in addition to the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c (Sk34), and then the process proceeds to the step of Sk35.

  In step Sk35, it is determined whether or not the stop function is set to be valid. If the stop function is set to be invalid in the step of Sk35, the process proceeds to step Sk44, and if the stop function is set to be valid in the step of Sk35, a stop code indicating the stop state is set in the register. Then, the stop code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sk37). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sk38). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is further detected. (Sk39), if the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, it is further determined whether the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sk40), and if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected. Return to the step of Sk38. When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sk38, when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step of Sk39, the operation proceeds to the step of Sk42, and the operation of the settlement switch 10 is performed in the step of Sk40. If detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 32 is performed (Sk41), and the process returns to the step of Sk36.

  In step Sk42, the stop code stored in the register is cleared. And the display state of the game auxiliary | assistant display 12 is cleared, and it progresses to the step of Sk44.

  In step Sk44, after initialization 4 is performed to initialize unused areas and unused stack areas in the RAM 41c, the game end process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the process at the end of the game, it is determined for each game whether the regular bonus is not activated during the big bonus, and if the regular bonus is not activated during the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated. It is supposed to let you.

  In addition, before determining whether the regular bonus is inactive, it is determined whether the big bonus end condition is satisfied. If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination, the regular bonus is determined. It is determined whether or not the bonus is inactive. When the bonus is inactive, the regular bonus is activated.

  Further, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB medium signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed, Even if the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops, and when the output waiting time elapses in this state, the RB is started again. The signal output is resumed.

  In addition, during the period until the production waiting time of the BB winning effect and the ending effect elapses, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, the settlement of the credit is performed. Control will be performed. In addition, even when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated even in the stopped state, and the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, the credit settlement control is performed.

  43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, interrupting the start process or the game process at an interval of 0.56 ms. .

  In the timer interrupt process (main), interrupts are first prohibited (Sn1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sn2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sn3). In the step of Sn3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referenced to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sn4). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sn8 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sn23 described later is executed (Sn5).

  Next, it is determined whether it is 1 or not, that is, timer interrupt 2 with reference to the minute counter value (Sn6), and if it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, timer interrupt 1, it is a reel motor. Reel starting process (Sn7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step process (Sn8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, the motor phase signal standby process (Sn9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a predetermined time has been sequentially executed, and then the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20). The interrupt prohibited in the step is permitted (Sn21), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

  Further, in the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sn6, LED dynamic display processing (Sn10) for dynamically lighting various indicators, control signal output processing for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port, etc. (Sn11), random number update processing for updating various software random numbers (Sn12), time counter update processing for updating various time counters (Sn13), and command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 After the processing (Sn14) and the external output signal update processing (Sn15) for updating the external output signal are sequentially executed, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20), and the interrupt prohibited in the Sn1 step is permitted. (Sn21) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4 is found in the step of Sn4, it is further determined by referring to the counter value for wake-up 3 whether it is a timer interrupt 4 (Sn16). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Sn17) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing through the origin of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (reel reference) (Passing position) to detect the occurrence of a reel rotation error, check if the stop preparation is complete, and if the stop preparation is complete and if it is rotating at a constant speed, the spinning reel Based on detection signals of various switches, these various switches satisfy the detection conditions, and perform processing to validate the operation of the stop switch corresponding to After sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Sn19) to determine whether or not, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step are permitted (Sn21) Return to the process before interrupt.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 at the step of Sn16, the stop position is determined from the stop operation position when the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is determined, and the number of steps after which the stop should be calculated is calculated. Stop switch process (Sn22), the number of steps until the stop calculated in the stop switch process is counted, and when it is time to stop, stop process (Sn23) to start braking by two-phase excitation, After executing the final stop process (Sn24) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start, the registers saved in the stack area in Sn2 are restored (Sn20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step are permitted. (Sn21), the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop switch process executed by the CPU 41a in the timer interrupt 4 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  In the stop switch process, it is first determined whether or not a stop operation has been detected for all reels in the order of left, middle, and right (Sp1, Sp2). If no stop operation has been detected for all reels, The stop switch process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If a stop operation of any of the reels is detected in the step Sp1, the stop control table corresponding to the reel is referred to and the stop operation position set for the work corresponding to the stop reel is set. The area number that becomes the stop position is specified from the area number including the number of steps (Sp3), and the number of steps required from the current reel reference position to the stop position specified in the step of Sp3 is calculated. After setting the number of steps (Sp4), the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 46 shows a power interruption interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 2, that is, when a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is inputted, interrupting the execution process or the game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of.

  In the power interruption interruption process (main), first, interruption is prohibited (Sk1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing (main). Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sk2). Although the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, they are not stored here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sk3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not input, the register saved in the stack area in Sk2 is restored (Sk4), the interrupt prohibited in the Sk1 step is permitted (Sk5), and the process before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sk3, destruction diagnosis data (in this embodiment, 5A (H)) is set (Sk6), and all output ports are initialized (Sk7). ). Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sk8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sk9).

  Then, except for the determination as to whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sk10, where Sk10 is the same process as Sk3), the process enters a loop process in which no process is performed. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after prohibiting access to the RAM 41c, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the startup processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it transfer.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described below based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the sub-control unit 91, the CPU 91a performs a startup process (sub) shown in FIG.

  In the startup process (sub), the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sr1), and then access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Sr2). Then, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Sr3), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Sr4).

  If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the Sr4 step, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal. It is determined whether or not a time effect or an ending effect has been executed (Sr21).

  If the BB winning effect or ending effect is being executed, it is determined whether the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage (Sr22). If the final stage has been reached, After setting the final control pattern (Sr23), the process proceeds to Sr6. In addition, according to the control pattern set in Sr23, effect control processing for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed (Sr11).

  Also, if the BB winning effect or ending effect has not been executed before the power interruption in step Sr21, or if the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage in step Sr22, After setting the control pattern last executed before disconnection (returning to the effect state before power interruption by executing this setting) (Sr5), the process proceeds to Sr6. In addition, according to the control pattern set in Sr5, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed (Sr11).

  In Sr6, only the command reception interrupt process is permitted (Sr6), and the process proceeds to Ss7.

  If the RAM parity is not 0 in step Sr4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal. After the RAM 91c is initialized (Sr13), the standby pattern is set as a control pattern (Sr14). Only command reception interrupt processing is permitted (Sr6), and the process proceeds to step Sr7.

  In step Sr7, it is determined whether an initialization command has been received. If no initialization command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sr8, in which it is determined whether a power-on command has been received. If the initialization command is received, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sr15), the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Sr16), and the process proceeds to Sr11.

  In step Sr8, if a power-on command is not received, the process returns to step Sr7 again. If a power-on command is received, the process proceeds to step Sr9.

  In step Sr9, based on the power-on command received in step Sr8, it is determined whether or not a special role is elected in the state before power interruption (Sr13), and the special role is elected in the state before power interruption. If the special role notification pattern for notifying the winning of the special role is set as the control pattern (Sr10), the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reels are set according to the set control pattern. An effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the LED 55 is executed (Sr11), all interruptions are permitted (Sr12), and the process proceeds to a loop process.

  Further, in the step Sr9, when the special role is not elected in the state before the power interruption, the liquid crystal display according to the control pattern set in the step Sr5, that is, the control pattern set before the power interruption. 51, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, reel LED 55, etc. is executed (Sr11), all interruptions are permitted (Sr11), and the process proceeds to a loop process.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (sub) executed by the CPU 91a at intervals of 1.12 ms based on the count of the internal clock.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), first, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the buffer (Ss1). If no command is stored in the buffer, the process proceeds to step Ss7. If a command is stored in the buffer, the command is acquired from the buffer (Ss2), and the process proceeds to step Ss3.

  In the step of Ss3, in accordance with the received command, continuous effect processing for executing the continuous effect such as continuous effect lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the step of Ss4.

  In the step of Ss4, when the received command is an internal winning command, it is determined whether or not an effect pattern for continuous effects is already set in the RAM 91c. If the effect pattern for continuous effects is not set, the ROM 91b is determined. An effect pattern is selected by referring to the effect table stored in the table, selecting an effect pattern at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and setting the selected effect pattern in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. The selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss5.

  In step Ss5, processing corresponding to the received command is performed, and the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, and the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control registered corresponding to the received command are stored. A control pattern setting process for reading the pattern and setting it in the RAM 91c is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss6.

  In step Ss6, in accordance with the control pattern set in step Ss5, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs is executed. Proceed to step.

  In step Ss7, after updating the values of various counters such as a random number counter in the RAM 91c, the process proceeds to step Ss8, where it is confirmed whether or not the content of data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of startup is normal. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0, so that the timer interrupt process (sub) is completed.

  That is, the CPU 91a does not set the RAM parity adjustment data when the power interruption is detected like the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, but the RAM parity adjustment data for each timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed. Even if the power is cut off, it is possible to determine whether or not the content of the data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of recovery is normal.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the control pattern setting process executed by the CPU 91a in the step Ss5 of the timer interrupt process (sub).

  In the control pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a setting start command (St1). If the received command is a setting start command, the setting notification pattern is set as a control pattern (St1), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not a setting start command in step St1, it is determined whether the received command is an initialization command (St3). If the received command is an initialization command, all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized (St4), the above-mentioned standby pattern is set as a control pattern (St5), the control pattern setting process is terminated, Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an initialization command in the step of St3, it is determined whether or not the received command is a standby command (St6). If the received command is a standby command, the standby pattern is set as a control pattern (St7), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not a standby command in the step of St6, it is determined whether or not the received command is a stop command (St8). If the received command is a stop command, it is further determined whether or not it is a stop command indicating the start (occurrence) of a stop state (St9), and if it is a stop command indicating the start of the stop state. Then, the stop notification pattern is set as a control pattern (St10), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not a stop command indicating the start of the stop state, that is, if it is a stop command indicating the release of the stop state, the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (St7), and the control pattern setting process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of St8, when the received command is not a stop command, it is determined whether or not the received command is an error command (St11). If the received command is an error command, it is further determined whether or not it is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error condition (St12). If the received command is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error condition, the currently set control pattern is determined. Are temporarily saved in the stack (St13), the error notification pattern is set as a control pattern (St14), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not a stop command indicating the occurrence of an error state, that is, if it is a stop command indicating the release of the error state, the control pattern saved in the stack when the error occurs is set in step St13 ( St15), the control pattern setting process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an error command in the step of St11, it is determined whether or not the received command is a payout start command (St16). If the received command is a payout start command, the payout pattern is set as a sub-pattern (St17), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. The sub-pattern is a control pattern that is set in an area different from the area in which the control pattern of the effect that is being executed is set, and is executed when the effect is executed in parallel with the control pattern of the effect that is being executed. It is a control pattern that is set separately from the control pattern for the production. That is, normally, when a new control pattern is set, the control pattern that was originally set is overwritten, whereas the control pattern is set as a sub-pattern, so that Patterns are set at the same time. For this reason, when the payout pattern is set as the sub-pattern in the step of St17, an effect based on the payout pattern is executed concurrently with the effect currently being executed.

  If the received command is not a payout start command in the step of St16, it is determined whether or not the received command is a payout end command (St18). If the received command is a payout end command, the payout pattern set as the sub-pattern is cleared (St19), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, in the step of St19, only the effect based on the payout pattern that has been executed in parallel is finished, and only the effect that was originally executed continues.

  If it is determined in step St18 that the received command is not a payout end command, it is determined whether the received command is a winning determination command (St20). If the received command is a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning (St21). If the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning, the BB winning pattern is set as a control pattern (St22), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the winning determination command does not indicate a big bonus, it is further determined whether or not a winning other than the big bonus is indicated (St23). If the prize determination command indicates a prize other than the big bonus, it corresponds to the winning prize among the winning patterns for executing the winning effect in which a specific effect is executed when the winning occurs. The winning pattern to be set is set as a control pattern (St24), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If it is determined that the winnings other than the big bonus are not indicated in the step of St23, the process proceeds to St29.

  If the command received in the step of St20 is not a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the received command is a gaming state command (St25). If the received command is not a gaming state command, the process proceeds to St29. If the received command is a gaming state command, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is set in the RAM 91c (St26), and based on the set gaming state. It is then determined whether or not the game is a game for which a big bonus end condition is satisfied (St27). If the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the ending pattern is set as a control pattern (St28), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the game is not a game for which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied in step St27, the process proceeds to step St29.

  In step St29, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the received command are read and set, and the control pattern setting process is performed. To return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram of a first modification of the processing until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. Also in the first modification, the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a further extracts the value of the internal refresh register (R register) 41R as a processing random number. The CPU 41a adds the processing random number extracted from the R register 41R to the value of the upper byte of the general register 41GR (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c). The value of the lower byte of the general register 41GR (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) is left as it is.

  Next, the CPU 41a performs an OR operation with the value of the general-purpose register 41GR, that is, a value obtained by adding a processing random number to the upper byte with 8080h. Further, the CPU 41a shifts the upper 1 byte (8th bit to 15th bit) to the lower bit by bit and inserts 1 into the empty 15th bit. At this time, the CPU 41a uses the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values thereto.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram of a second modification of the processing until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. Also in this example, the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a further extracts the value of the internal R register 41R as a processing random number. The CPU 41a adds the processing random number extracted from the R register 41R to the value of the upper byte of the general register 41GR (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c). Further, the processing random number extracted from the R register 41R is also added to the lower byte value (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) of the general-purpose register 41GR.

  Next, the CPU 41a performs a logical OR operation with the value of the general-purpose register 41GR, that is, the value obtained by adding the processing random numbers to the upper byte and the lower byte, respectively, with 8080h. Further, the CPU 41a shifts the upper 1 byte (8th bit to 15th bit) to the lower bit by bit and inserts 1 into the empty 15th bit. At this time, the CPU 41a uses the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values thereto.

  In the first and second modified examples described above, the value of the R register 41R is extracted as a random number for processing, and this is extracted from the high-order byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 (in the second modified example, further lower byte) ) To process random numbers. The random number processing applied here includes at least processing for adding a processing random number to the upper byte. Thereby, the variation of the random numbers for internal lottery can be increased, and the player can prevent the aiming as much as possible.

  Further, since the processing random numbers are extracted from the R register 41R, no special configuration is required as means for generating the processing random numbers. Moreover, the value of the R register 41R is updated every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction, and the update interval is not constant. Therefore, a random number with high randomness can be extracted as a processing random number. And since the randomness of the processing random number is high, the randomness of the random number for internal lottery generated using the random number is also high.

  In the first and second modifications, the value extracted from the R register 41R is added to the upper byte (and the lower byte) of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42. A value that is periodically updated by hardware or software may be added. Further, instead of adding the value extracted from the R register 41R (or a value instead of the R register), a logical operation such as subtraction, logical sum, or logical product may be performed.

  Further, bit replacement such as replacement of the upper byte and the lower byte shown in the above embodiment may be used in combination with the first and second modifications. Also in the first and second modified examples, the interruption to the CPU 41a is prohibited in order to prevent the contents of the HL register from being rewritten until the processing is completed after the random number is extracted from the random number generation circuit 42. Will be.

  In the second modification, processing random numbers to be added to the upper byte and lower byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be separately extracted from the R register 41R at different timings. Separately prepare the processing random number to be added to the upper byte and the processing random number to be updated to the lower byte. Means for extracting may be provided. In this case, one of the means for updating the processing random number for the upper byte and the means for updating the processing random number for the lower byte can be constituted by the R register.

  In the present embodiment, it is difficult to connect the driving tool by restricting the release of the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component. Specifically, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a. And the connection between the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 and the connection between the board-side connector 622g of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g are restricted from being released from each other. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a is restricted by the connector restricting member 500, the connection between the cable-side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a, and the connection between the board-side connector 622g and the cable-side connector 612g. The release of the connection is regulated by the connector regulating member 650.

  Next, the detailed structures of the board case 200 and the connector restricting member 500 that house the game control board 40 will be described.

  52 and 53 are exploded perspective views showing the board case 200 and the mounting base 250 for attaching the board case 200 to the casing forming the main body of the slot machine 1 and the connector restricting member 500. FIG. FIG. 55 is an enlarged perspective view of the main part of the attachment side member 510 and the connector cap 520 constituting the connector restricting member 500, and FIG. 56 (a) is a perspective view showing a state in which 200 is attached to the attachment base 250. 55 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 55, FIGS. 56B and 56C are cross-sectional views taken along the line BB in FIG. 55, and FIG. FIG. 58A is a perspective view showing a state in which a connector cap is attached to the member 510, FIG. 58A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 57, and FIG. D is a cross-sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the board case 200 includes a lower case 201 as a case body that covers the back side of the game control board 40, and an upper case 203 that covers the mounting surface side of the game control board 40. And assembled so as to sandwich the game control board 40. The mounting surface of the game control board 40 is connected to electronic elements such as a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, and RAM 41c, and a cable-side connector provided at one end of a cable from another board, although not shown in detail. Many board-side connectors 620a to 620c are mounted.

  The lower case 201 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper surface is opened by a bottom plate 201a formed in a substantially rectangular shape and side walls formed so as to surround the periphery of the bottom plate.

  The two short side walls 201c of the lower case 201 are provided with two sealing pieces 211 and 211 protruding outward, and the other short side wall 201d has two pairs of locking portions. 210 protrudes outward. In addition, engagement grooves 212 are formed at both ends of the long side from the side wall 201d on the back surface of the bottom plate 201a of the lower case 201 to engage engagement pieces 511 of the attachment side member 510 described later.

  The upper case 203 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the lower surface is open, the center of the upper surface bulges, and the step portions 203a and 203b are formed on both short sides. It is shaped like a box. The lower surface of the upper case 203 has the same shape as the lower case 201, and a space for accommodating the game control board 40 is formed inside by assembling the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 together.

  On the side wall 203c on one short side of the upper case 203, sealing pieces 231 and 231 are disposed outwardly at locations corresponding to the sealing pieces 211 and 211 provided on the side wall 201c on one short side of the lower case 201, respectively. The four sealing pieces 232 are provided to protrude outwardly at equal intervals between the sealing pieces 231 and 231. The other short side wall 203d of the upper case 203 is engaged with the pair of locking portions 210 at locations corresponding to the two pairs of locking portions 210 provided on the other short side wall of the lower case 201, respectively. Engaging engaging portions 230 are provided. Further, on the other short side wall 203d of the upper case 203, a locking piece 235 that engages with locking holes 251a and 251a of the mounting base 250, which will be described later, at a position outward from the engaging portion 230. 235 is provided.

  The step portions 203a and 203b on both short sides of the upper case 203 are formed with recesses 203e and 203f, respectively. In particular, the bottom surface of the recess 203f of the step portion 203b is accommodated in the substrate case 200. An insertion hole 234 through which the board-side connector 620a can be inserted is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the gaming control board 40.

  The mounting base 250 is a member for fixing the substrate case 200 to a housing forming the main body of the slot machine 1. The mounting base 250 is made of synthetic resin, and, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, a bottom plate 250 a formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the bottom plate 201 a of the lower case 201, and two of the peripheral edges of the upper plate The side walls 250b and 250c formed on the long edges are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper surface is open. Screw holes 252 are formed at a plurality of locations on the bottom plate 250a of the mounting base 250, and a side wall 250d having a notch 250e at the center is formed on one short side of the bottom plate 250a. Are provided with a pair of guides 254, 254 from the notch 250e of the side wall 250d toward the center. Guide grooves 254a and 254a into which engaging portions 257 and 257 formed at both ends of a fixing member 255 described later are fitted are formed on the opposing surfaces of the guides 254 and 254, respectively.

  The fixing member 255 is made of a synthetic resin, and drooping pieces 255b and 255b extending downward (rearward in the figure) from both ends of the fixing piece 255a having four fixing holes 256 formed on the upper surface, and the drooping piece 255b. The engaging portions 257 and 257 are formed in a substantially U-shape formed in the left and right direction (up and down direction in the drawing) from both ends of the 255b. The fixing member 255 is attached to the attachment base 250 by fitting the locking portions 257 and 257 into the guide grooves 254a and 254a formed in the guides 254 and 254 of the attachment base 250, respectively.

  On the short side of the mounting base 250 on which the side wall 250d is formed, a locking column 253 having an inward locking claw 253a at the tip is provided upright from the bottom plate 250a, and on the opposite short side. Engagement holes 251 and 251 in which engagement holes 251 a and 251 a into which the engagement parts 230 of the upper case 203 are inserted are connected to the bottom plate 250 a are provided upright at both ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the connector regulating member 500 is attached to the board case 200 and the cable side attached to the board side connector 620a and attached to the board side member 510. A connector cover 520 that covers a part of the connector 610a, and the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, and the connector cover 520 is attached to the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a. Removal is regulated.

  The attachment-side member 510 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is formed into a shape that conforms to the surface shape of the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the substrate case 200, as shown in FIGS. Specifically, the attachment side member 510 is attached to the short side where the engaging portion 230 of the upper case 203 is provided, and the shape thereof is the step portion 203b in the upper case 203 when attached to the board case 200. Standing piece that stands up from both ends of the base piece 510a that is in contact with the bottom surface of the concave portion 203f and that has a notch 512 that allows the cable-side connector 610a to escape and a cylindrical locking hole portion 513 that has a locking hole 513a inside. Upper pieces 510c and 510c that contact the upper surfaces of both end portions of the stepped portion 203b in the upper case 203 are extended through 510b and 510b, and are further engaged through side pieces 510d and 510d depending from both ends of the upper pieces 510c and 510c. The stoppers 257 and 257 have a shape extending inward, and the base piece of the attachment-side member 510 is attached to the board case 200. 10a, the upper piece 510c, the opposing surface is adapted to abut respectively on the bottom of the top surface and the recess 203f of the stepped portion 203b of the upper case 203 relative to the board case 200 of 510c.

  As shown in FIG. 55, a locking groove 514 is provided on the inner surface of the locking hole 513 in the locking hole 513 at a position opposed to the center from the lower end of the locking hole 513a. Yes. The locking groove 514 has a substantially L shape including a shallow groove portion 514a having a shallow depth from the lower end of the locking hole 513a and a deep groove portion 514b deeper than the shallow groove portion 514a. 514a and deep groove portions 514b and 514b are formed at positions facing each other across the center. That is, the locking grooves 514 and 514 are formed symmetrically with respect to the center.

  The connector cover 520 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, is a cable connected to the board-side connector 620a when attached to the attachment-side member 510 attached to the board case 200. A covering portion 521 having a substantially U-shaped cross-sectional view covering a part of the side connector 610a is formed, and one side surface 521a of the side surface in the longitudinal direction of the covering portion 521 is formed with a locking hole portion 513 in the attachment side member 510. A locking cylinder 522 having substantially the same diameter as the inner periphery of the locking hole 513a is provided via the connection piece 522a.

  The lower end of one side surface 521a of the covering portion 521 contacts the upper surface of the base piece 510a when attached to the attachment-side member 510, and ribs 521b and 521b are provided on the back surface of the side surface 521a. The lower surface of 521b is also in contact with the upper surface of the base piece 510a.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the locking cylinder 522 has an outward locking claw 523a formed at the tip at a position opposed to the center of the locking cylinder 522, and provided with engaging portions 523 and 523 that can be elastically deformed inward. It has been. The engaging portions 523 and 523 have engaging holes 523a and 523a when the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment-side member 510 with the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a. The locking grooves 514 and 514 formed in the 513a are provided at positions that engage with the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a.

  Next, the state of attachment of the connector restricting member 500 to the board case 200 and the state of attachment of the board case 200 to the housing will be described.

  First, the game control board 40 is accommodated in the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the board case 200 to be in a sealed state. In order to seal the lower case 201 and the upper case 203, the engaging portions 230 of the corresponding upper case 203 are engaged with the two pairs of locking portions 210 of the lower case 201, respectively, One of the sealing pieces 211 of the case 201 and the corresponding sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 are fixed with a one-way screw.

  As is well known, a one-way screw can be screwed by rotation in one direction, but cannot be rotated even if it is rotated in the other direction, that is, the screw cannot be loosened. It is a screw. For this reason, when one sealing piece 211 of the lower case 201 and the corresponding sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 are fixed with a one-way screw, either the sealing piece 211 or the sealing piece 231 is broken. Without this, these sticking cannot be released.

  Then, by fixing the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 231, the longitudinal movement of the upper case 203 with respect to the lower case 201 is restricted, and as a result, the upper case 203 is engaged with the locking portion 210 of the lower case 201. The release of the engagement of the joint portion 230 is also restricted, and the upper case 201 and the lower case 203 are integrated with the game control board 40 accommodated therein, and the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 231 are broken. Otherwise, it will not be possible to open.

  Next, the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200 in which the game control board 40 is sealed. The attachment-side member 510 is elastically deformed on both side pieces 510 d and 510 d outward and attached to the stepped portion 203 b of the upper case 203. Then, by releasing the elastic deformation, the engaging pieces 511 and 511 are attached by engaging with the engaging grooves 212 and 212 on the back surface of the lower case 201. At this time, the base piece 510a and the upper pieces 510c and 510c of the attachment-side member 510 are in contact with the top surface of the step 203b and the bottom surface of the recess 203f of the upper case 203, respectively, and the notch 512 provided in the base piece 510a The board-side connector 620a of the game control board 40 accommodated in the board case 200 is connected to the inside of the board case 200 through the notch 512 and the insertion hole 234 so as to coincide with the insertion hole 234 provided in the recess 203f of the upper case 203. To be exposed to the outside.

  Next, the mounting screw 259 is screwed into the housing side wall through the screw hole 252 of the mounting base 250 to fix the mounting base 250 to the housing, and the locking portions 257 and 257 of the fixing member 255 are fixed. The fixing member 255 is attached to the mounting base 250 by fitting into the engaging grooves 254a and 254a of the mounting base 250, respectively.

  Next, the board case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is assembled to the attachment base 250. Specifically, after inserting the locking pieces 235 and 235 protruding to one end side of the substrate case 200 into the locking holes 251a and 251a of the locking hole portions 251 and 251 of the mounting base 250, respectively, as shown in FIG. The substrate case 200 is accommodated between the side walls 250b and 250c of the mounting base 250, and the upper surface of the other end side step portion 203a of the substrate case 200 is locked by the locking claw 253a of the locking column 253, thereby fixing the substrate case 200. Temporarily fix to the mounting base 250. In this state, the four sealing pieces 232 provided at one end of the upper case 203 and the fixing holes 256 of the fixing member 255 attached to the mounting base 250 are in corresponding positions, and in this state, any of the sealing pieces The sealing piece 232 and the fixing member 255 are fixed by screwing the aforementioned one-way screw into the corresponding fixing hole 256 from above the H.232.

  Then, by fixing the sealing piece 232 and the sealing piece fixing member 255, the movement of the substrate case 200 in the removal direction from the mounting base 250 at the end of the substrate case 200 on the sealing piece 232 side is restricted and the locking is performed. Since the horizontal movement of the substrate case 200 toward the sealing piece 232 side is also restricted by the pillar 253, the locking pieces 235 and 235 protruding to one end side of the substrate case 200 are removed from the locking holes 251 a and 251 a of the mounting base 250. It becomes impossible. Further, in this state, the screw holes 252 of the bottom plate 250a of the mounting base 250 are all covered with the substrate case 200, and access to the mounting screws 259 is impossible, and the mounting base 250 cannot be removed from the housing. Become. In this way, the substrate case 200 to which the attachment-side member 510 is attached is fixed to the housing via the attachment base 250, and the substrate case 200 is attached to the housing unless the sealing piece 232 or the fixing member 255 is broken. It will be in the state which cannot be removed from.

  When the board case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is fixed to the attachment base 250 (housing) so as not to be detached, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the side piece 510d of the attachment side member 510 is provided. 510d abuts against the inner surfaces of the side walls 250b, 250c of the mounting base 250 and is held between them so that deformation of the both side pieces 510d, 510d of the mounting side member 510 outward is restricted. It becomes impossible to remove from 200.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54, the cable 600a is connected to the board-side connector 620a of the game control board 40 exposed through the insertion hole 234 of the board case 200 and the notch 512 of the base piece 510a in the attachment-side member 510. After the cable-side connector 610a is connected, the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a are connected to cover the cable-side connector 610a with a covering portion 521 of the connector cover 520 as shown in FIG. Then, the locking cylinder 522 of the connector cover 520 is fitted into the locking hole 513 a of the locking hole 513 in the attachment side member 510. As a result, the engaging portions 523 and 523 of the locking cylinder 522 abut against the inner periphery of the locking hole 513a and elastically deform inward. At this time, when the engaging portions 523 and 523 are positioned to cover the cable-side connector 610a with the covering portion 521, the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a among the engaging grooves 514 and 514 formed on the inner surface of the locking hole 513a. The locking cylinder 522 is further fitted, and the locking claws 523a and 523a at the tips of the engaging portions 523 and 523 reach the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a of the engaging grooves 514 and 514, As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the inward elastic deformation of the engaging portions 523 and 523 is released, and the locking claws 523a and 523a engage with the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a, respectively. The upward movement is restricted, and the side surface 521a of the covering portion 521 is brought into contact with the side surfaces of the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a, so that the locking cylinder 522 By rotating against stop hole section 513 is restricted, and ligated with the mounting member 510 and the connector cover 520, a state of integrated connector regulating member 500 is formed. In this state, since the engaging portions 523 and 523 are covered with the locking hole portion 513, it is impossible to elastically deform the engaging portions 523 and 523 inward from the outside, and the connector cover 520 or the attachment side member Unless 510 is broken, the connector cover 520 cannot be removed from the attachment side member 510.

  When the connector cover 520 is detachably attached to the attachment side member 510, a part of the upper surface of the cable side connector 610a is covered by the covering portion 521 as shown in FIGS. The movement of 610a in the pulling direction from the board side connector 620a is restricted, and the removal of the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a is restricted.

  As described above, with the mounting side member 510 attached to the board case 200, the board case 200 is fixed to the housing, and then the cable side connector 610a is connected to the board side connector 620a. By attaching a part of 620a to the attachment side member 510 so as to cover from above, the cable side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board side connector 620a.

  Next, a situation when the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a is released will be described.

  In order to release the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a, the attachment side member 510 or the cable cover 520 is broken and the connector cover 520 is removed from the attachment side member 510, or the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200 is removed. Alternatively, it is necessary to break the fixing member 255, remove the board case 200 from the mounting base 250, and remove the mounting side member 510 with the connector cover 520 attached thereto from the board case 200.

  For example, when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a due to a failure of the cable 600a or the like, the latter method is used when the board case 200 is removed by the former method and replaced by the board failure or the like. Just remove it.

  First, when replacing the cable 600a, when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a, a method for removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment-side member 510 will be described. First, a connector such as a nipper is used. The connecting piece 522a that connects the covering portion 521 of the cover 520 and the locking cylinder 522 is broken. As a result, the covering portion 521 is separated and the locking cylinder 522 can be rotated with respect to the locking hole portion 513. In this state, by rotating the locking cylinder 522 counterclockwise as viewed from above, the engaging portions 523 and 523 move from the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a of the engaging grooves 514 and 514 to the positions of the deep groove portions 514b and 514b. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), from the state where the locking claws 523a, 523a are engaged with the shallow groove portions 514a, 514a, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the locking claws 523a, 523a The shallow groove portions 514a and 514a are disengaged. As a result, the locking cylinder 522 can be moved upward. As shown in FIG. 56 (c), when the locking cylinder 522 is pulled upward, the locking claws 523a and 523a are engaged with the deep grooves 514b and 514b. However, in this state, since the engaging portions 523 and 523 are exposed, the engaging portions 523 and 523 can be elastically deformed inward, and the engaging claws 523a can be elastically deformed inwardly. 523a and the deep groove portions 514b and 514b are disengaged, and the locking cylinder 522 can be detached from the attachment side member 510, whereby the connector cover 520 is completely separated from the attachment side member 510, and the connector cover 520 Since the restriction of the movement in the pulling direction of the cable side connector 610a due to is also released, the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a is released. Door will be able to.

  When the connector cover 520 is removed from the attachment-side member 510, the covering portion 521 and the locking cylinder 522 are broken, and once broken, the original state is not restored. Therefore, the connection between the cable-side connector 610a and the board-side connector 620a There will be traces of unlocking.

  Next, when it is necessary to remove the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a when replacing the whole board case 200, a method of removing the attachment side member 510 from the board case 200 together with the connector cover 520 will be described. The sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 fixed to the fixing member 255 is broken with a tool such as a nipper. As a result, the end of the substrate case 200 on the side of the sealing piece 232 can be moved away from the mounting base 250, so that the locking claw 253 a of the locking column 253 and the stepped portion 203 e of the substrate case 200 Release the engagement. Accordingly, the horizontal movement toward the sealing piece 232 is also possible, so that the locking pieces 235 and 235 of the board case 200 are removed from the locking holes 251a and 251a of the mounting base 250. Thereby, the board case 200 is detached from the attachment base 250, and the side pieces 510d and 510d of the attachment side member 510 can be deformed outwardly, without removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment side member 510. The attachment-side member 510 can be removed from the board case 200. With this, the attachment-side member 510 is removed from the board case 200 in a state of being integrated with the connector cover 520, whereby the cable-side connector 610a is removed by the connector cover 520. Since the restriction on the movement in the direction is also released, the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a can be released.

  In order to remove the attachment side member 510 from the substrate case 200 also by this method, the sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 fixed to the fixing member 255 needs to be broken. Therefore, a trace of releasing the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a remains.

  Further, according to this method, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200 is broken and remains on the fixing member 255, but the attachment side member 510 can be removed from the board case 200 without removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment side member 510. Therefore, by attaching the attachment side member 510 with the connector cover 520 assembled to the new board case 200 in which the game control board 40 is accommodated for replacement, the cable side connector 610a and the board side in the new board case 200 are attached. The connection with the connector 620a is disabled, the new fixing member 255 is mounted on the mounting base 250, and the new board case 200 with the mounting side member 510 with the connector cover 520 assembled is mounted on the mounting base. Attached to 250, the fixing member 255 and the sealing piece 232 are fixed. In Rukoto, becomes again impossible removably mounting member 510, when releasing the connection between the cable-side connector 610a and the substrate-side connector 620a is in a state leave its mark. That is, in such a case, the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 can be reused.

  In this embodiment, the engaging portions 511 and 511 of the attachment side member 510 are engaged with the engaging grooves 514 and 514 formed on the back surface of the substrate case 200 in a state where the engaging portions 511 and 511 are elastically deformed outward. When the attachment member 510 is attached to the substrate case 200 and the substrate case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is fixed to the attachment base 250 (housing) so as not to be detached, the attachment side member 510 side Since the pieces 510d and 510d abut against the inner surfaces of the side walls 250b and 250c of the mounting base 250 and are held between the pieces, the deformation of the both side pieces 510d and 510d of the mounting side member 510 is restricted outward. Although it is a structure that cannot be removed from the substrate case 200, for example, a part of the attachment side member can be screwed or removed on the back surface of the substrate case 200. The board case 200 is fixed to the casing by fixing the board case 200 to the casing (mounting base) so that the screws and the locking pins are concealed. Thus, the attachment-side member may be restricted from being removed from the substrate case 200, and the attachment-side member is fixed to the housing in a state where the attachment-side member is attached to the substrate case 200. Any configuration may be adopted as long as the configuration cannot be removed from the substrate case 200.

Next, the detailed structure of the connector restricting member 650 will be described.
59 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 constituting the connector restricting member 650. FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cover member 680 is assembled to the mounting table 660. 61A is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 60, and FIG. 61B is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the connector restricting member 650 includes a mounting table 660 on which the operation unit relay board 110 is mounted, and a cover member 680 that covers the mounting table 660 from above. After accommodating the operation unit relay board 110, the cable side connectors 611a and 612g of the corresponding cables 600a and 601g are connected to the board side connectors 621a and 622g of the operation unit relay board 110, and then the cover member 680 is attached to the case. By attaching to the body 610, removal of the cable side connectors 611a and 612g from the board side connectors 621a and 622g is restricted.

  The mounting table 660 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a larger diameter than the operation unit relay substrate 110. As shown in FIG. 59, board-side connectors 621a, 622a, 622b, 622c, 622d to 622f, and 622g are mounted on the operation unit relay board 110, both side faces on the long side of the mounting table 660, and short boards. The board side connectors 622a, 622b, 622c, and 622d to 622f whose insertion holes open in the horizontal direction with respect to the mounting surface in the operation part relay board 110 when the operation part relay board 110 is placed on one side surface of the side. Each of the locking holes 661 having the locking holes 661b is provided via the connection piece 661a so as to protrude outward, avoiding the portion where the 622g is located. On the inner peripheral surface of the locking hole 661b, a pair of locking claws 661c and 661c facing the center are formed at positions facing each other across the center.

  The cover member 680 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is formed in substantially the same shape as the mounting table 660. On one long side, the cover member 680 is located at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110. A cover portion 681 that bulges toward the front side at a position corresponding to the board-side connectors 622a and 622b of the operation portion relay board 110 on the other long side. Cover portions 689 that bulge toward the front are formed at positions corresponding to 622c, 622g, and 622d to 622f, respectively.

  On the upper surface 681a of the cover portion 681, a notch 681b for releasing the cable 600a connected to the board side connector 621a, which is narrower than the long side of the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a, is formed on the outer side surface. Thereby, covering surfaces 681c and 681 are formed on both side ends of the upper surface 681a, respectively.

  The cover portion 688 has notches 682a for releasing the cables 612a and 612b connected to the board side connectors 622a and 622b, and the cover portion 689 has a cable 612c connected to the board side connector 622c. A notch 682b for releasing the cable, a notch 632c for releasing the cable 612g connected to the board-side connector 622g, and a notch 682d for releasing the cables 612d-f connected to the board-side connectors 622d-f are formed. Has been. In particular, the notch 682c for releasing the cable 612g connected to the board-side connector 622g is formed to be narrower than the length of the long side of the cable 601g, and both ends of the notch 682c are covered from the cover portion 689. Pieces 683 and 683 are respectively provided.

  Further, on both side surfaces on the long side of the cover member 680 and on one side surface on the short side, the locking holes are formed so as to protrude outward at positions corresponding to the locking holes 661 of the mounting table 660. A locking cylinder 684 having substantially the same diameter as the inner peripheral surface of 661b is provided via a connection piece 684a. Lock holes 684 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the lock cylinder 684 at locations corresponding to the pair of lock claws 661c provided on the inner periphery of the lock hole 661b. Can be combined.

  Next, the mounting state of the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 59, the operation unit relay board 110 is mounted on the mounting table 660, and the board-side connectors 621a, 622a, 622b, 622c. , 622d to 622f and 622g are connected to cable side connectors 611a, 612a, 612b, 612c, 612d to 612f and 612g, respectively. After connecting these cable side connectors to the board side connector, the cover member 680 is attached to the mounting table 660.

  Specifically, the locking cylinder 634 of the cover member 680 is fitted into the locking hole 661 b of the corresponding locking hole 661 of the mounting table 660. Then, by pushing the locking cylinder 634 into the locking hole 661b, the locking claw 661c in the locking hole 661b is engaged with the locking hole 684 of the locking cylinder 684. Thereby, it becomes impossible to release the engagement between the locking claw 661c and the locking hole 684 from the outside, and as shown in FIG. 60, the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are connected to the locking hole. If the part 661 or the locking cylinder 634 is not broken, it is in a state where it is assembled so that it cannot be removed.

  When the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are assembled, as shown in FIG. 61A, the upper surfaces of both ends of the cable-side connector 611a connected to the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 are the cover members. Covered by the covering portions 681c and 681c of 680, the movement of the cable side connector 611a in the pulling direction from the board side connector 621a is restricted, and the removal of the cable side connector 611a from the board side connector 621a is restricted. ing.

  Further, when the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are assembled, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the upper surfaces of both ends of the cable side connector 612g connected to the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 are the cover members. 680 covering pieces 683 and 683 are covered, and movement of the cable side connector 612g from the board side connector 622g is restricted, and removal of the cable side connector 612g from the board side connector 622g is restricted. ing.

  Next, the situation when the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a and the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g are released will be described.

  In order to release the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a and the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g, a connecting piece 684a for connecting the locking cylinder 684 of the cover member 680 with a tool such as a nipper is provided. Break. As a result, the main body of the cover member 680 and the locking cylinder 684 are separated, and the cover member 680 can be removed from the mounting table 660. By removing the cover member 680 from the mounting table 660, the covering portions 681c and 681c. The restriction on the movement of the cable side connector 611a in the unplugging direction is released, and the restriction on the movement of the cable side connector 612g in the unplugging direction by the covering pieces 683 and 683 is also released, so the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a are released. And the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g can be released.

  When the cover member 680 is removed from the mounting table 660, the main body of the cover member 680 and the locking cylinder 684 are broken. Once the cover member 680 is broken, the original state is not obtained and the separated locking cylinder 684 is removed from the mounting table 660. Therefore, there remains a trace that the connection between the cable-side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a and the connection between the cable-side connector 612g and the board-side connector 622g are released. It will be.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game accommodated in the board case 200 by attaching the connector restricting member 500 including the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 to the board case 200. The removal of the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a of the control board is restricted, and in this state, the board case 200 is attached to the attachment base 250 and the fixing member 255 and the sealing piece 232 are fixed to each other. The removal of the connector restricting member 500 from the case 200 will be restricted, and the sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 will not be broken to release the fixation between the substrate case 200 and the housing (mounting base 250). The cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board-side connector 620a. In other words, the cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed without leaving a trace that the sealing piece 232 is broken, and a fraudulent instrument such as a driving instrument cannot be connected without leaving a trace. It will be possible to reliably discover that there is a possibility that

  Further, when the game control board 40 is replaced together with the board case 200 containing the game control board 40 due to a failure or the like, the sealing piece 232 is broken to fix the board case 200 and the housing (mounting base 250). If released, the connector restricting member 500 can be detached from the board case 200 and the cable side connector 610a can be removed from the board side connector 620a. Therefore, the connector restricting member 500 can be destroyed or the board case 200 can be destroyed. The cable-side connector 610a can be separated from the board-side connector 620a without opening.

  Further, the connector restricting member 500 is composed of an attachment side member 510 and a connector cover 520. After the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, the cable side connector 610a is connected to the board side connector 620a, and the board is in that state. The cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board-side connector 620a by being attached to the attachment-side member 510 so as to cover a part of the cable-side connector 620a from above. Is connected to the board-side connector 620a, and then the locking cylinder 522 of the connector cover 520 is fitted into the locking hole 513a of the locking hole 513 of the attachment-side member 510 located around the board-side connector 620a. The connector cover 520 is simply attached to the attachment side member 510. Since part of the cable-side connector 610a is covered and the movement of the cable-side connector 610a in the unplugging direction is restricted, the assembly work is reduced in restricting the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a. it can.

  Further, even when the game control board 40 is housed in the board case 200, it is only necessary to connect the cable side connector 610a to the board side connector 620a as it is, and then attach the connector cover 520. In this case, the assembly work can be more effectively reduced when the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a is restricted.

  In addition, the connector cover 510 does not cover the entire connection portion between the cable-side connector 610a and the board-side connector 620a, but covers only a part of the cable-side connector 610a in the pulling direction side. Not only can the connector 610a be securely removed from the board-side connector 620a, but also the material required for manufacturing the connector cover 510 can be reduced.

  Further, since the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 with only one locking cylinder 522, the structure of the connector cover 520 and the attachment side member 510 can be simplified. A plurality of stop cylinders 522 may be provided, and a locking hole 513a may be provided at a corresponding position on the attachment side member 510, and the connector cover 520 may be attached to the attachment side member 510 at a plurality of locations. By doing so, the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a can be more firmly regulated. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to attach the connector cover 520 to the attachment side member 510 at a plurality of locations across the connection portion between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a. The removal and removal of the side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a can be more firmly regulated.

  In addition, the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 with only one locking cylinder 522, but a rib that contacts the surface of the base piece 510a of the attachment side member 510 is provided on one side wall of the connector cover 520. Since 521b and 521b are formed and the movement of the connector cover 520 is restricted, the removal of the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a can be reliably restricted.

  In addition, inwardly engaging portions 511 and 511 are formed at both ends extending from the base piece 510a of the attachment side member 510, and the engaging portions 511 and 511 are elastically deformed outward. In this state, the mounting member 510 is attached to the board case 200 by being assembled to the board case 200 and engaged with the locking grooves 514 and 514 formed on the back surface of the board case 200. Since the member 500 can be attached to the board case 200 without using other members such as screws and pins, the number of components can be reduced.

  Further, when the attachment side member 510 constituting the connector restricting member 500 is attached to the board case 200, the opposing surfaces of the attachment side member 510 to the base case 510 a and the upper pieces 510 c, 510 c with respect to the board case 200 are the steps in the upper case 203. The upper surface of the portion 203b and the bottom surface of the concave portion 203f are in contact with each other, so that it is possible to effectively prevent unauthorized parts and the like from being attached between the connector restricting member 500 and the surface of the board case 200.

  Further, since the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 constituting the connector restricting member 500 are both made of a transparent synthetic resin material, the visibility in the board case 200 may be impaired by the connector restricting member 500. Therefore, there is no problem in monitoring the game control board 40. Further, even when an unauthorized part is attached to the gap between the connector restricting member 500 and the board case 200, it can be easily found.

  In the present embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable of the cable 600a. Connection between the side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and connection between the board-side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g. The restriction member 500 and the connector restriction member 650 are used for restriction. As a result, one of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is replaced with a connector such as an illegal driving tool and connected to the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 for illegal actions relating to the progress of the game. Therefore, it is difficult to carry out fraudulent activities such as inputting / outputting various signals, so that illegal business operations can be effectively prevented.

  Further, in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200, the connection piece 522a of the connector cover 520, and the connection piece 684a of the cover member 680 are broken. As a result, when even one connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. , The above fraud can be more effectively suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are connected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, one of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is replaced with a connector such as an unauthorized driving tool, and the game control board 40 is connected. Since it is difficult to perform an illegal act such as causing the main control unit 41 to input / output an illegal signal related to the progress of the game, it is possible to effectively prevent an illegal business operation.

  In the present embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 that input signals to the game control board 40 as the game progresses and the game Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 for which signals are output from the game control board 40 according to progress, a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40. The release of connections between connectors is regulated. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will be impossible to automatically advance the game automatically, so that it is possible to prevent fraud with the minimum restrictions, and to disconnect these connectors The number of parts can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, only the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is provided with a connector restricting member to restrict the release of the connectors, but the start lever 7 and the game control board The same effect can be obtained by providing a connector restricting member only for connector connection between the connectors 40 and restricting the release of the connection between the connectors. In addition, if the reel is not configured to stop until the reel is operated after the reel starts rotating, only the connector connection between the stop switch 8L, 8C, or 8R and the game control board 40 is restricted. The same effect can be obtained even if a member is provided to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 and the operation part relay board 110 are connected to the main control part 41 and a plurality of electronic components that perform input / output of signals necessary for the progress of the game. Are connected by a single cable 600a. Therefore, by restricting the connector connection between the board-side connector 610a and the cable-side connector 620a of the game control board 40, that is, only one connector connection is released. The release of the connection between the signal lines can be restricted, and it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  Even when a plurality of signal lines connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components that perform input / output of signals necessary for the progress of the game are connected via a plurality of cables, the board-side connector is connected. A plurality of parts are prepared for restricting the release of these connector connections by restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board-side connectors and the plurality of cable-side connectors with a single part, as well as being arranged in close proximity. There is no need, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the connection between the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a connecting the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 and the board side connector 621a of the operation part relay board 110 is released, and the operation unit relay board. Since the release of the connection between the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g connecting the 110 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the board-side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 is simultaneously restricted by one connector restricting member 650, these There is no need to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of a plurality of connector connections, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the backup power source of the main control unit 41 is connected from the game control board 40 to the cable 600a-operation unit relay board 110-cable 601g-inserted medal sensor 31-cable 601g-operation unit relay board 110-cable 600a. After being routed, the main control unit 41 is supplied, and the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off, and the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a. Connection between the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and connection between the board side connector 622g of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612g of the cable 601g. By disconnecting the connection. Up power supply line is disconnected, it can not hold data RAM41c of the main control unit 41, so that the lost. That is, when even one connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the backup data held in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is lost. On the other hand, in order to connect an unauthorized device such as a driving device, it is necessary to insert / remove the connector, but even if a special device is selected by using the driving device, the connector must be replaced with a regular connector. Since the data in the RAM 41c is initialized by releasing the connection, the slot machine 1 set in a state in which the special role is elected using the driving tool is provided to the player at the time of starting the business of the game shop. Unauthorized sales such as doing can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the backup power is returned from the game control board 40 to the game control board 40 via the inserted medal sensor 31 and supplied to the main control unit 41, so that the connector connection between them is performed. The data in the RAM 41c is lost when the game is released, but the electronic components (for example, the start lever 7 and the reels after the reel starts rotating after the signal input / output necessary for the progress of the game) are performed. The same effect as described above can be obtained even if the operation is performed via stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc., which are not configured to stop the reel until the stop operation is performed.

  Capacitors and batteries that store backup power are mounted on electronic component mounting boards and relay boards (operation unit relay board 110, etc.) for these electronic parts, which are required to input and output signals necessary for the progress of the game. A backup power supply line from a capacitor or a battery mounted on the mounting board or the relay board is connected to the game control board through a cable together with a signal line of the electronic component and supplied to the main control unit 41. Even in this case, since the data in the RAM 41c is lost when the connector connection between the mounting board or the relay board and the game control board 40 is released, the same effect as described above is obtained. In addition, the game control board 40 can be backed up via a cable from a capacitor or battery mounted on the mounting board or relay board. Therefore, in order to continue supplying the backup power to the main control unit 41 when the cable is disconnected, it is necessary to short-circuit the backup power supply line across the boards. Since it becomes very difficult to release the connector connection in a state in which the backup power supply is continuously supplied, the connection of the driving tool can be effectively prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the backup power is supplied to the main control unit 41 via electronic components so that the data in the RAM 41c is lost when the connector connection is released.・ Equipped with a signal output circuit that always outputs a specific signal even in the event of a power failure, and always detects a specific signal even in the event of a power failure, and stores that fact when the detection of a specific signal is interrupted A signal monitoring circuit is mounted on the game control board 40, and the output path of this specific signal is transferred from the game control board 40 to the game control board 40 via electronic components that are required to input and output signals necessary for the progress of the game. Whether the signal monitoring circuit stores information indicating that the detection of the specific signal is interrupted when the main control unit 41 is started up. If it is confirmed that the detection of a specific signal is interrupted, the initialization 1 described above may be executed to clear the data stored in the RAM 41c. However, it is possible to prevent illegal sales such as providing the slot machine 1 that has been set in a state where the special role is won using the driving tool to the game player at the start of the game shop business.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the state before power interruption is restored, and when the special role is elected before power interruption, the CPU 41a turns on the power indicating that the special role is elected. When the sub-control unit 91 transmits a command and receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the sub control unit 91 executes a notification effect indicating that the special role is won. It is continuously executed until it is received, that is, until the winning special role is won.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 produces the effect even if the backup is normal until it receives a power-on command or an initialization command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized as will be described later. There is no return to the state, and even if another command is received, the production is not controlled accordingly. For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 can Since the initialization command is not received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission line of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 is disconnected at the time of activation, the power-on command is issued on the sub control unit 91 side. It is impossible to avoid the reception of the special role and to avoid the execution of the announcement effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and from before the power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is always notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). With the above configuration, the connector is forcibly released. Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. In addition, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing the gaming machine with the slot machine 1 set in a state in which the special role is won using the driving tool at the start of the business of the game shop.

  In addition, the notice effect is continuously executed until a winning judgment command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won, so that the special role is won, that is, the winning flag of the special role is set. The notification effect will not stop until it is cleared, and it will not be possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role election by the amusement store. Unauthorized sales such as providing the slot machine 1 set to "" to a player at the start of business at a game shop can be further effectively prevented.

  In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the state before power interruption is restored, and when the special role is elected before power interruption, the CPU 41a turns on the power indicating that the special role is elected. When the sub-control unit 91 transmits a command and receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the sub-control unit 91 executes a notification effect indicating that the special role is won, and the special role is notified. However, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display directly controlled by the main control unit 41 when the main control unit 41 returns to the state before the power interruption and the special role is won before the power interruption. 12. The same effect as described above can be obtained even if the payout display 13 notifies the winning of the special role. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption. In such a case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether or not the value read from the set value work is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is in the proper range is determined for each game. If it is determined and the value read from the set value work is not a value in the range of 1 to 6, it is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In the present embodiment, the value stored in the set value work, that is, the range of the set value that can be selected by the setting change process is a value of 1 to 6. Therefore, the value stored in the set value work is 1 to 6. If the value is not within the range, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Furthermore, when the set bet amount is a bet number according to the gaming state, a process for determining whether or not the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state is executed for each game. Control of the error state due to the RAM abnormal error disables the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the number of bets corresponding to each gaming state is determined. However, when a game is played with a bet number different from the bet number, the data stored in the RAM 41c is broken. Since there is a possibility that an illegal program is operating or not, even if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Then, once controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. Is not released. In other words, if the set value is not appropriate due to garbled data or illegal program operation, or if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, the set value automatically set by the slot machine Rather, the game is played based on the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, since the setting change operation is performed by an amusement shop employee, the game shop side selects the setting value). This ensures that the game is fair.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the progress of the game is disabled, and the error due to the RAM abnormality error once. When the state is controlled, the state is changed to the setting change mode, and the state in which the progress of the game is disabled is not released unless a set value is newly selected and set based on the setting change operation. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change Since the operation is performed by a game shop employee, it is ensured that the game is played based on the setting value selected by the game shop), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal in most cases when the control cannot be continued due to a malfunction such as a power failure or the CPU 41a running out of control. For this reason, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the data is normal only when the CPU 41a is activated after recovering from these states. Therefore, whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal. This determination can be made only in a situation where there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data. That is, in a situation where there is a low possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data, it is not necessary to perform the determination, and the load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the result of the exclusive OR operation is 0 based on the RAM parity based on all the data in the RAM 41c in the power interruption processing (main), Since it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas in the RAM 41c at the time of restoration is 0. The determination can be performed accurately and simply.

  Further, in addition to the RAM parity adjustment data, the destructive diagnosis data whose bit value is not 1 in the power interruption interrupt process (main) is stored in the RAM 41c, and the RAM parity is 0 at the time of restoration. Even in such a case, it is further determined whether or not the destruction diagnosis data is normally stored. The data in the RAM 41c is initialized during the power failure, and the state before the power failure cannot actually be restored. Nevertheless, since all the data in the RAM 41c is 0, it is not determined to be normal.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the connection between the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released even at one place, the backup data held in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is lost. However, since the destruction diagnosis data is also cleared to 00H with this, the CPU 41a can reliably determine that the RAM error has occurred when starting in this state and disable the progress of the game.

  In addition, when a combination that has not been won in the internal lottery or when a special role and a general role are won at the same time, that is, when a non-winning role is won or when a special role and a general role are won at the same time The data may be destroyed, or an abnormal program may be operating. In such a case, the progress of the game will be disabled, and the fairness of the game may be impaired. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, once an error state is controlled, the game progress is disabled unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. The status is not released. In other words, when an unacceptable winning combination wins due to garbled data or abnormal program operation, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting selected and set based on the setting change operation Since it is ensured that the game is played based on the value (generally, the setting change operation is performed by an employee of the amusement shop and is a setting value selected by the amusement shop side), the game is fair. be able to.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged in the horizontal direction, and generally, there are many right-handed players and right-handed players. When the player performs an operation such as sliding the stop switches 8L, 8L, and 8R with the thumb, for example, it is easier to operate from the left to the right. It can be said that after the start of the game, the percentage of stop operations in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel is high.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the medal insertion portion 4 is disposed on the right side of the front door as viewed from the player side, and the start lever 7 is disposed on the left side of the front door. Yes. Generally, there are many right-handed players, the medal insertion part 4 is arranged on the right side so that the medal can be inserted with the right hand, and the start lever 7 is arranged on the left side, which is easier to operate than the medal insertion. Because it is. In addition, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, and a general slot machine is usually provided with a start lever on the left side. From the point of view, it can be said that after the game is started, the stop operation is performed in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning flag for replay is set, if the left reel is first stopped, the combination of “replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines L1 to L5. In contrast, when the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “replay” symbol is controlled on the winning line L2 or L5, and the bell If the left reel is first stopped when the winning flag is set, control is performed so that the combination of “bells” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5. When the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, control is performed to draw the “bell” symbol on the winning line L1. In other words, in order to simplify stop control when stop operations are performed in a stop order other than the stop order that is generally selected, the left reel is first stopped in games where replays or bells are won. In other words, in general, when a reel having a high ratio of stopping first is stopped first, the control in which the winning combination of all the winning lines L1 to L5 can be matched, that is, display modes are various. When the reels other than the left reel are stopped before the left reel, that is, when the reel with the low rate of stopping first is stopped first, the winning combination is controlled. However, control that is arranged only on a specific winning line among the winning lines L1 to L5, that is, control that simplifies the display mode is performed.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Needless to say, it is included.

  For example, in the above embodiment, a method for restricting connector removal by attaching the connector restricting member 500 to the board case 200 is the same as the cable 600a for connecting the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110, and the game control. Although applied to the connector connection with the substrate 40, other connector connections, for example, the connector connection between the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable 600a, the cables 601a to connect the operation unit relay board 110 and the game electronic components. g, a connector connection between the operation unit relay board 110, a cable 600b connecting the game control board 40 and the reel relay board 120, a connector connection between the game control board 40, a connector connection between the reel relay board 120 and the cable 600b, Cables 601h to connect the reel relay board 120 and the game electronic components Connector connection between the control board 40 and the power supply board 100, the connector 600 between the game control board 40 and the game control board 40, the connector connection between the power supply board 100 and the cable 600c, and the power supply board 100. Cable 601n connecting o and electronic components for gaming, connector connection between o and power supply board 100, cable 600d connecting game control board 40 and effect relay board 80, connector connection between game control board 40, effect relay Applicable to connector connection between the board 80 and the cable 600d, connector connection between the cable 601p connecting the effect relay board 80 and the effect control board 90 and the effect relay board 80, connector connection between the cable 600p and the effect control board 90, etc. May be. That is, in the configuration in which a plurality of gaming electronic components are connected to the game control board via the relay board, all of the connector connection portions on the relay board side to which the gaming electronic component side cable and the game control board side cable are connected, The restriction method may be applied without omission to all connector connection portions on the game control board side to which the relay board side cable is connected.

  In the above embodiment, the method for restricting the release of the connection between the connectors has been described. For example, an electronic device that inputs and outputs signals necessary for the progress of the game, such as the inserted medal sensor 31 and the start lever 7. It is preferable to attach a covering member that covers the parts and the connection points between the electronic parts and the cables so that they cannot be accessed from the outside. By doing so, signals necessary for the progress of the game are input and output. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent instrument such as a driving instrument from being attached to the connection portion between the electronic component and the cable. In addition, it is preferable to adopt a structure in which a trace remains (such as a structure that cannot be removed unless a part of the covering member is destroyed) when the covering member that covers the connection portion between the electronic component and the cable is removed. By doing so, it becomes possible to leave a trace on which the illegal device is attached, and it is possible to grasp the possibility that there was an illegal act after the fact.

  In the above embodiment, the connector restricting member 500 is configured separately from the board case 200, and the board case 200 is removed from the mounting base 250, whereby the connector restricting member 500 is removed from the board case 200 and the connector is removed. However, for example, when the connector restricting member 500 is once attached to the board case 200, the connector restricting member may be used if the board case 200 or a part of the connector restricting member 500 is not destroyed. 500 may be removed from the substrate case 200 so that the restriction on connector removal cannot be released.

  In the above-described embodiment, the connector regulating member 500 includes the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520. After the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, the cable side connector is connected to the board side connector. In this state, by attaching the connector cover 520 to the attachment side member 510, the removal of the connector is restricted. However, the cable side connector is connected to the board side connector and integrated from the beginning. Further, the connector restricting member 500 may be attached to the board case 200 to restrict the connector from being removed.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the example using the connector control member 500 was demonstrated as a method of restrict | releasing cancellation | release of the connection of the board | substrate side connector of the board | substrate accommodated in the board | substrate case, and the cable side connector, There may be.

  Next, a modified example of the method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector will be described.

[Modification 1]
FIG. 62 is a perspective view showing the structure of the substrate case 700 and the connector cover 710 in the first modification.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the board case 700 in Modification 1 is composed of a lower case 700a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 700b that covers the upper part of the lower case 700a. Each of the lower case 700a and the upper case 700b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) like the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment, and the corresponding sealing pieces are connected to each other by a one-way screw or the like. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  In the upper case 700b, an insertion hole 701 for inserting the board-side connector 620a is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the stored game control board 40. Further, locking pieces 702 and 702 each having a locking hole 703 are erected in the vicinity of both sides of the insertion hole 701 of the upper case 700b.

  The connector cover 710 is formed in a box shape having an open lower surface and a rear surface in the drawing, and has a length that can cover the board-side connector 620a and the locking pieces 702 and 702 with the openings on the lower surface and the rear surface.

  The front surface of the connector cover 710 in the figure relates to positions corresponding to the locking holes 703 and 703 formed in the locking pieces 702 and 702 when the board-side connector 620a and the locking pieces 702 and 702 are covered. Stop holes 711 and 711 are formed, and concave grooves 712 and 712 larger in diameter than the locking holes 711 and 711 are formed in the periphery thereof.

  Further, a thin portion 715 is formed by forming a notch 713 and a long hole 714 at positions from the center of the locking holes 711 and 711 on the front surface and the upper surface of the connector cover 710 in the drawing.

  Next, a method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector and a method for canceling the cable side connector according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the cable-side connector 610a and the locking pieces 702, 702 connected to the board-side connector 620a are covered by the connector cover 710 in a state where the cable-side connector 610a is connected to the board-side connector 620a. . As a result, the locking holes 711 and 711 of the connector cover 710 and the locking holes 703 and 703 of the locking piece 702 are in communication with each other, and the locking pins 720 are attached to the communicating locking holes 711 and 703. To do.

  The locking pin 720 is a member in which a locking claw 721 whose tip is elastically deformable inward is formed on the head having substantially the same diameter as the concave groove 712. As shown in the enlarged sectional view of FIG. By inserting the locking claw 721 side of the locking pin 720 into the locking hole 711 and the locking hole 703, the locking claw 721 is elastically deformed inward, and the head of the locking pin 720 is formed in the concave groove 712. By inserting until it is filled, the elastic deformation of the locking claw 721 is released, the locking claw 721 engages with the locking piece 702, and the locking pin 720 is not removable from the connector cover 710 and the locking piece 703. Accordingly, the connector cover 710 is fixed so as not to be removable from the upper case 700b via the locking piece 702.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the cable side connector 610a and the locking pieces 702 and 702 connected to the board side connector 620a are covered with the connector cover 710, and the locking pins 720 are mounted in the locking holes 711 and 703. As a result, the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a is covered with the connector cover 710 and the surface of the upper case 700b, and movement of the cable-side connector 610a with respect to the board-side connector 620a is restricted. Therefore, the removal of the cable side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a is restricted. Further, since the connector cover 710 is fixed so as not to be detached from the upper case 700b via the locking piece 702 by mounting the locking pin 720, the locking piece 702 of the connector cover 710 or the upper case 700b must be destroyed. The connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a cannot be released.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 64, by cutting the thin portion 715 formed on the connector cover 710 with a tool such as a nipper N, the connector cover 710 is connected to the board side connector 620a as shown in FIG. The covered portion of the cable-side connector 610a is separated from the portions 710 ′ and 710 ′ connected to the locking pieces 702 and 702, and the covering is released to release the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a. It becomes possible. Even in this case, since the portions 710 ′ and 710 ′ of the connector cover 710 connected to the locking pieces 702 and 702 remain fixed to the upper case 700b, the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a is left. You can leave a trace that has been released.

  In the method of the first modification, the locking pieces 702 and 702 are erected on the upper case 700b. However, as in the above-described embodiment, the locking pieces 702 and 702 are provided on the mounting side member and formed on the mounting side member. The connector restricting member is configured by erecting locking pieces in the vicinity of both sides of the insertion hole through which the board-side connector 620a is inserted, and fixing the connector cover 710 to the locking piece of the mounting side member. In this way, even when the board is exchanged together with the board case, the board case can be opened without breaking the board case or without breaking the mounting side member or the connector cover 710 and separating them. The connection between the side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a can be released.

[Modification 2]
FIG. 66 is a perspective view showing the structure of the substrate case 730 and the connector cover 740 in the second modification.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the board case 730 according to the second modification includes a lower case 730a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 730b that covers the upper part of the lower case 730a. Each of the lower case 730a and the upper case 730b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) like the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment, and the corresponding sealing pieces are connected to each other by a one-way screw or the like. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  In the upper case 730b, an insertion hole 731 for inserting the board-side connector 620a is formed at a location corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the stored game control board 40. Further, locking pins 735 and 735 are formed in the vicinity of both sides of the insertion hole 731 of the upper case 730b, and locking pins 735 and 735 each having locking claws 736 and 736 whose tips are elastically deformable inward.

  Further, the connector cover 740 is formed so that the lower surface and the rear surface in the figure are opened, can cover the board-side connector 620a, and has a length longer than the separation width of the locking pins 735 and 735. . Further, attachment surfaces 746 and 746 are formed on part of the lower surface of both ends of the connector cover 740. When the board-side connector 620a is covered on the attachment surfaces 746 and 746, the locking pins 735 and 735 are formed. Slots 747 and 747 are respectively formed at positions corresponding to. Each of the long holes 747 has a long diameter in a direction perpendicular to the locking claws 736 and 736 of the locking pin 735, and the width of the short diameter portion of the long hole 747 is the same as that of the locking claws 736 and 736. It is formed narrower than the distance between the tips.

  Further, a thin portion 745 is formed by forming a notch 743 and a long hole 744 at positions from the center of the long holes 747 and 747 on the front surface and the upper surface of the connector cover 740 in the drawing.

  Next, a method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector and a method for releasing the same will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69.

  As shown in the enlarged sectional view of FIG. 66, with the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a, the locking pins 735 and 735 of the upper case 730b are connected to both mounting surfaces 746 and 746 of the connector cover 740. The formed long holes 747 and 747 are inserted. When the locking pins 735 and 735 are inserted into the long holes 747 and 747, the locking claws 736 and 736 are elastically deformed inward, until the mounting surface 746 of the connector cover 740 and the upper surface of the upper case 730b come into contact with each other. By inserting the locking pins 735 and 735, the elastic deformation of the locking claws 736 and 736 is released, the locking claws 736 and 736 engage with the mounting surface 746, and the locking pins 735 and 735 are connected to the connector cover. The connector cover 740 is fixed to the upper case 730b through the locking pins 735 and 735 so as not to be removed.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the connector cover 740 covers the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a, and the locking pins 735 and 735 are attached to the long holes 747, whereby the connector cover 740 and the upper case 730b are attached. The cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a is covered with the surface of the cable, and movement of the cable-side connector 610a with respect to the board-side connector 620a is restricted, so that the cable-side connector 610a with respect to the board-side connector 620a is restricted. Withdrawal will be regulated. Further, the connector cover 740 is fixed so that the connector cover 740 cannot be removed from the upper case 730b via the locking pins 735 and 735 when the locking pins 735 and 735 are locked to the long holes 747 and 747. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a cannot be released unless the locking pins 735 and 735 of the connector cover 740 or the upper case 730b are broken.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the thin portion 745 formed in the connector cover 740 is cut with a tool such as a nipper N, so that the connector cover 740 is connected to the board side connector 620a as shown in FIG. The covered portion of the cable-side connector 610a is separated from the portions 740 ′ and 740 ′ connected to the locking pins 735 and 735, and the covering is released to release the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a. It becomes possible.

  To remove the locking piece 740 ', as shown in FIG. 69, the locking piece 740' is rotated in the black arrow direction a in the figure so as to align with the longitudinal direction of the long hole 747 (the vertical direction in FIG. 69). . As a result, the engagement between the locking pin 735 and the locking piece 740 'is released. Then, the locking pieces 740 ′ and 740 ′ can be removed from the upper case 730 b by pulling out the locking pieces 740 ′ in the black arrow direction b in the figure. Even in this case, the connector cover 740 is destroyed and cannot be returned to the original state, so that a trace remains that the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a is released.

  In the method of the second modification, the locking pins 735 and 735 are erected on the upper case 730b. However, as in the above-described embodiment, the mounting pins are provided on the board case and formed on the mounting side member. By fixing the locking pins 735 and 735 in the vicinity of both sides of the insertion hole for allowing the board-side connector 620a to be inserted, and fixing the connector cover 740 to the locking pins 735 and 735 of the attachment side member, The connector restricting member may be configured, and in this way, even when the board is replaced with the board case, the board case is broken and opened, or the attachment side member or the connector cover 740 is broken. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be released without separation.

[Modification 3]
FIG. 70 is a perspective view showing the structure of the substrate case 750 and the connector cover 760 in the third modification.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the board case 750 in the third modification is composed of a lower case 750a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 750b that covers the upper part of the lower case 750a. Each of the lower case 750a and the upper case 750b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) similarly to the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment, and the corresponding sealing pieces are connected to each other by a one-way screw or the like. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  In the upper case 750b, an insertion hole 751 for inserting the board-side connector 620a is formed at a location corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the stored game control board 40. In addition, attachment holes 754 and 754 are formed on the side surface of the upper case 750b located behind the insertion hole 751. A locking piece 752 having a locking hole 753 is provided in the vicinity of the insertion hole 751 of the upper case 750b in the lower case 750a.

  The connector cover 760 is formed so as to open from the lower surface to the rear surface in the drawing, and has a length that can cover the board-side connector 620a. On the rear surface of the connector cover 760 in the figure, when the board-side connector 620a is covered, mounting pieces 764 and 764 having locking claws at the tips project from the rear at positions corresponding to the mounting holes 754 and 754. Has been. Further, on the front surface of the connector cover 760 in the figure, a locking piece 762 having a locking hole 763 is formed at a position corresponding to the locking piece 752 when the board-side connector 620a is covered.

  Next, based on FIG. 71, a method for restricting the removal of the cable-side connector from the board-side connector and a method for releasing it will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 71A, the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a is covered with the connector cover 760 in a state where the cable-side connector 610a is connected to the board-side connector 620a. When the corresponding mounting pieces 764 and 764 of the connector cover 760 are inserted into the mounting holes 754 and 754 of the upper case 750b, the locking claws of the locking pieces 764 and 764 engage with the mounting holes 754 and 754, and the connector cover 760 Is in a state in which it cannot be removed from the upper case 750b. When the connector cover 760 is attached to the upper case 750b in this way, the engagement holes 763 of the engagement pieces 762 of the connector cover 760 and the engagement holes 753 of the engagement pieces 752 of the lower case 750a are in communication with each other. The binding band 769 is attached to the locking hole 763 and the locking hole 753.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the binding band 769 is formed with a label portion 768 to which an ID number or the like that allows ID management is given, an engaging portion 766 in which a locking hole 766a is formed, and a part thereof at a predetermined pitch. And a band portion 767 having a locking projection 767a. The engagement hole 766a is engaged with the locking projection 767a when the band portion 767 is inserted into the locking hole 766a. An engagement claw (not shown) is formed to be stopped. As a result, once the band portion 767 is inserted into the engagement hole 766a, the removal of the band portion 767a in the direction opposite to the direction of insertion through the engagement hole 766a is restricted.

  When the band portion 767 of the binding band 769 is inserted through the engagement hole 766a, the band portion 767a is disengaged from the engagement hole 766a due to the engagement between the locking protrusion 767a of the band portion 767 and the engagement claw of the engagement hole 766a. Since the removal is restricted, the locking piece 762 and the locking piece 752 are fixed. Then, the engagement between the attachment pieces 764 and 764 and the attachment holes 754 and 754 and the connection with the engagement pieces 762 and the engagement pieces 752 by the binding band 769 restrict the movement of the connector cover 760 in the vertical and horizontal directions. Is attached to the substrate case in a non-removable manner with respect to 750.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the connector cover 760 is attached to the board case 750, the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a is covered with the connector cover 760, and the cable to the board side connector 620a is covered. Since the movement of the side connector 610a in the pulling direction is restricted, the removal of the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a is restricted. Further, the mounting pieces 764 and 764 engage with the mounting holes 754 and 754, and the locking pieces 762 and the locking pieces 763 are fixed so as not to be detached by the binding band 769. Therefore, the substrate is not cut unless the binding band 769 is cut. The connection between the side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a cannot be released.

  For releasing the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a, for example, by cutting the binding band 769 with a tool such as a nipper, the fixing of the locking piece 762 and the locking piece 752 is released, and the connector Since the cover 760 can be opened upward and the cable-side connector 610a can be moved in the pulling direction, the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be released. Even when the binding band 769 is cut and replaced with a new binding band, the ID number or the like is given to the label portion 768 of the binding band 769, so that the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be made. The released trace can be left.

  In the method of the third modification, the locking piece 753 protrudes from the lower case 730a. However, the mounting piece is provided with an attachment side member attached to the board case as in the above embodiment, and the attachment side member has an attachment hole and A connector restricting member may be configured by providing a locking piece having a locking hole and fixing the connector cover 760 to the locking piece of the attachment side member. Even when replacing the entire board case, the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be disconnected without breaking and opening the board case or forming the binding band 769.

[Modification 4]
FIG. 72 is a perspective view showing the structure of the substrate case 770 and the connector cover 780 in the fourth modification.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the board case 770 in Modification 4 includes a lower case 770a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 770b that covers the upper part of the lower case 770a. Each of the lower case 770a and the upper case 770b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) like the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment, and the corresponding sealing pieces are connected to each other by a one-way screw or the like. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  In the upper case 770b, an insertion hole 771 for inserting the board-side connector 620a is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the stored game control board 40. Further, locking pieces 772 and 772 formed with locking holes 773 and 773 project from the front surface of the lower case 770a in the vicinity of the insertion hole 771.

  The connector cover 780 is formed so that a lower surface and a rear surface in the drawing are opened, and has a length that can cover the board-side connector 620a.

  Locking pieces 782 and 782 project from the front surface of the connector cover 780 in the figure at positions corresponding to the locking pieces 772 and 772 when the board-side connector 620a is covered. The locking pieces 782 and 782 are formed with locking holes 783 and 783 at positions corresponding to the locking holes 773 and 773 formed in the locking pieces 772 and 772. A step portion capable of accommodating a screw head is formed on the upper portion of the locking hole 783.

  Next, a method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector and a method for canceling the cable side connector in Modification 4 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a is covered with the connector cover 780 in a state where the cable side connector 610a is connected to the board side connector 620a. Then, in a state where the locking holes 783 and 783 of the locking pieces 782 and 782 of the connector cover 780 are in communication with the locking holes 773 and 773 of the locking pieces 772 and 772, any one of these communicating locking holes 783. And, as shown in FIG. 74, the one-way screw P is screwed into the corresponding locking holes 773 and 773 until the head is accommodated in the stepped portion.

  As a result, the locking piece 782 of the connector cover 780 and the locking piece 772 of the lower case 770a are fixed, and the connector cover 780 is fixed to the board case 770 so as not to be detached. In this state, the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a is covered with the connector cover 780 and the surface of the upper case 770b, and movement of the cable side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a is restricted. Therefore, the removal of the cable side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a is restricted. Further, since the connector cover 780 is fixed so as not to be detached from the board case 770 by screwing the one-way screw P, the board-side connector 620a and the cable side are not damaged unless the locking piece 772 of the connector cover 780 or the lower case 770a is broken. The connection with the connector 610a cannot be released.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75, the connector cover 780 is formed by breaking the locking piece 782 fixed to the locking piece 772 of the locking pieces 782 and 782 formed on the connector cover 780 with a tool such as a nipper N. 780 can be removed from the board case 770, and by removing the connector cover 780 from the board case 770, the cable side connector 610a can be moved in the pulling direction, and the connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a can be performed. It becomes possible to cancel. Even in this case, since the locking piece 782 broken from the main body of the connector cover 780 remains attached to the locking piece 772, the trace of the connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a being released. Can leave.

  The connector cover 780 is formed with a plurality of locking pieces 782 and a plurality of locking pieces 772 corresponding to the lower case 770a, and any one of the plurality of locking pieces 782 is formed. Since the connector cover 780 is fixed to the board case 770 in a non-removable manner only by fixing the locking piece 772 corresponding to one, and the release of the connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a is restricted. Even if the locking piece 782 is broken, the connector cover 780 is removed, and the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a is released, if the unused locking piece 782 remains, the unused engagement By fixing the stopper piece 782 and the corresponding locking piece 772, the removed connector cover 780 cannot be removed again from the board case 770. Fixed, it is possible to regulate the release of the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a. That is, while the unused locking piece 782 remains, the connector cover 780 can be used repeatedly and can be reused while leaving the removed trace.

  In the method of Modification 4, the locking pieces 772 and 772 project from the lower case 770a. However, as in the above-described embodiment, the mounting pieces are attached to the board case, and A connector restricting member may be configured by providing a locking piece having a stop hole, and fixing the locking piece of the attachment side member and the locking piece 782 of the connector cover 780. Even when replacing the board together with the board case, the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be connected without breaking and opening the board case or breaking the attachment-side member or the connector cover 780 and separating them. It can be canceled.

[Modification 5]
76 and 77 are perspective views showing the structure of the substrate case 790 and connector covers 791 and 797 in the fifth modification.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the board case 790 in the modified example 5 includes a lower case 790a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 790b that covers the upper part of the lower case 790a. Each of the lower case 790a and the upper case 790b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) like the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment, and the corresponding sealing pieces are connected to each other by a one-way screw or the like. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  The connector cover 791 has a length that can cover the board-side connector 620a. The connector cover 791 has an opening at the front surface in the drawing and a bottom surface cut out in accordance with the major axis size of the board connector 620a, and end portions 7911 and 7911 facing the inside are formed on the cut-out bottom surface. Locking holes 793 and 793 are formed on the upper surface of the connector cover 791. A step portion capable of accommodating a screw head is formed on the upper portion of the locking hole 793. Further, a thin portion 795 is formed by forming a long hole 794 at a position from the center of the locking holes 793 and 793 on the upper surface of the connector cover 791 in the figure. Further, the rear surface of the connector cover 791 is formed with a notch 792 (see FIG. 78) formed at the same position as the long hole 794 formed on the upper surface thereof. Elastically deformable.

  The connector cover 797 is formed with locking holes 798 and 798 communicating with the locking hole 793 formed in the connector cover 791, and also formed with notches 792 and 792, and the thin portion 795 is formed by the notches 792. Is formed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79, a method for restricting the removal of the cable-side connector from the board-side connector and a method for releasing the same will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the connector cover 791 is fitted into the board-side connector 620a with the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a. At this time, the connector cover 791 is elastically deformed in a substantially C shape, and both end portions 7911 on the bottom surface of the connector cover 791 are arranged in the gap between the board-side connector 620a and the claw 6101 of the cable-side connector 610a. The board-side connector 620a is sandwiched between the bottom end portions 7911 of the cover 791. As a result, the connector cover 791 is temporarily fixed to the upper case 790b.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 77, the connector cover 797 is fitted into the connector cover 791 from the front surface of the connector cover 791. As a result, the locking holes 793 and 793 of the connector cover 791 and the locking holes 798 and 798 of the connector cover 797 communicate with each other, and the locking pins 796 are attached to the communicating locking holes 793 and 798. .

  The locking pin 796 is a member in which a locking claw 799 whose tip can be elastically deformed inward is formed in the same manner as the locking pin 720 already described as the first modification, and is shown in the enlarged sectional view of FIG. As described above, by inserting the locking claw 799 side of the locking pin 796 into the locking hole 793 and the locking hole 798, the locking claw 799 is elastically deformed inward, and the head of the locking pin 796 is connected to the connector. The elastic deformation of the locking claw 799 is released by inserting the cover 791 until it is buried in the concave groove, and the assembled state of the connector covers cannot be released with the locking pin 796 connecting the connector covers 791 and 797. As a result, the connector covers 791 and 797 are fixed so as not to be detached from the upper case 700b.

  Further, by cutting the thin portion 795 formed in the connector covers 791 and 797 with a tool such as a nipper N, the connector covers 791 and 797 are divided into 791a to 791c and 797a to 797c as shown in FIG. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be released.

  Instead of the connector cover 791, a connector cover 791 ′ in which an edge portion 793 a that covers the locking hole 793 is formed as shown in a one-dot broken line in FIG. 76 may be used. The edge portion 793a facilitates the mounting operation of the locking pin 796, and the connector cover can be more firmly attached using a longer locking pin having a longer diameter.

[Modification 6]
80 and 81 are perspective views showing the structure of the substrate case 800 and the connector covers 810 and 817 in the sixth modification.

  As shown in FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, the board case 800 in Modification 6 is composed of a lower case 800a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 800b that covers the upper part of the lower case 800a. Each of the lower case 800a and the upper case 800b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) similarly to the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment, and the corresponding sealing pieces are connected to each other by a one-way screw or the like. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  The connector cover 810 has a length that can cover the board-side connector 620a. The connector cover 791 has an opening at the front surface in the drawing and a bottom surface cut out in accordance with the major axis size of the board connector 620a, and end portions 8101 and 8101 facing the inner side are formed on the cut-out bottom surface. On the front surface of the connector cover 810 in the figure, a step portion for fitting the connector cover 817 is formed, and locking holes 811 and 811 are formed. Further, a thin portion 815 is formed by forming a long hole 814 at two places on the upper surface of the connector cover 810 in the drawing. Further, notches 892 and 892 (see FIG. 82) are formed on the rear surface of the connector cover 810, so that the connector cover 810 can be elastically deformed into a letter C shape.

  The connector cover 817 is formed with locking pins 816 and 816 whose tips can be elastically deformed inward, corresponding to the locking holes 811 and 811 formed in the connector cover 810. Further, notches 892 and 892 are formed in the connector cover 817, and a thin portion 815 is formed by the notches 892.

  Next, a method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector and a method for canceling the cable side connector in Modification 5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 80, with the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a, the connector cover 810 is fitted into the board side connector 620a. At this time, the connector cover 810 is elastically deformed into a substantially C shape, and both end portions 8101 on the bottom surface of the connector cover 810 are arranged in the gap between the board-side connector 620a and the claw 6101 of the cable-side connector 610a. The board-side connector 620a is sandwiched between the bottom end portions 8101 of the cover 810. As a result, the connector cover 810 is temporarily fixed to the upper case 800b.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 81, the connector cover 817 is fitted into the connector cover 810 from the front surface of the connector cover 810. As a result, the locking pins 816 and 816 of the connector cover 817 are inserted into the locking holes 811 and 811 of the connector cover 810. As shown in the enlarged sectional view of FIG. 82, by inserting the locking pin 816 into the locking hole 811, the locking claw 819 is elastically deformed inward, and the connector cover 817 is fitted into the step portion of the connector cover 810. In this state, the elastic deformation of the locking claw 819 is released, and the locking pin 816 is attached to the connector covers 810 and 817 so that the assembled state of both connector covers cannot be released. Connector covers 810 and 817 are fixed so as not to be detached from the upper case 800b.

  Further, by cutting the thin portion 815 formed in the connector covers 810 and 817 with a tool such as a nipper N, the connector covers 810 and 817 are divided into 810a to 810c and 817a to 817c as shown in FIG. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be released.

[Modification 7]
84 and 85 are perspective views showing the structure of the substrate case 820 and connector covers 830 and 837 in Modification 7. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the board case 820 in the modified example 7 includes a lower case 820a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 820b that covers the upper part of the lower case 820a. Each of the lower case 820a and the upper case 820b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) similarly to the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment, and the corresponding sealing pieces are connected to each other by a one-way screw or the like. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  The connector cover 830 has a length that can cover the board-side connector 620a, and has the engagement holes 831 and 831 and the notches 893 and 893 formed in the same manner as the connector cover 797 described as the modified example 5. In the bottom, ribs 8301 and 8301 are formed in the gaps between the board-side connector 620a and the claw 6101 of the cable-side connector 610a.

  The connector cover 837 has a length that can cover the connector cover 830. Similarly to the connector cover 797 described as the modified example 5, the connector cover 837 has a locking hole 832, a long hole 834, and a thin portion 835 on the upper surface, and a notch 893 (see FIG. 86) on the rear surface. , Each is formed. However, unlike the connector cover 797 described as the modified example 5, the bottom surface is completely opened in addition to the front surface.

  Next, a method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector and a method for canceling the cable side connector in Modification 7 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 84, with the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a, the connector cover 830 is fitted into the board side connector 620a. At this time, the connector cover 830 is elastically deformed into a substantially C shape, and both ribs 8301 and 8301 of the connector cover 830 are disposed in the gap between the board-side connector 620a and the claw 6101 of the cable-side connector 610a. The board-side connector 620a is sandwiched between the ribs 8301 and 8301 of the cover 830. As a result, the connector cover 830 is temporarily fixed to the upper case 820b.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 85, the connector cover 837 is fitted into the connector cover 830 from above the connector cover 830. As a result, the locking holes 832 and 832 of the connector cover 837 and the locking holes 831 and 831 of the connector cover 830 communicate with each other, and the locking pins 836 are attached to the communicating locking holes 832 and 831. .

  The locking pin 836 is a member in which a locking claw 839 whose tip can be elastically deformed inward is formed in the same manner as the locking pin 720 already described as the first modification. By inserting the 839 side into the locking hole 831 and the locking hole 832, the locking claw 839 is elastically deformed inward as shown in the enlarged sectional view of FIG. 86, and the head of the locking pin 836 is connected to the connector. Inserting the cover 837 into the concave groove releases the elastic deformation of the locking claw 839 and makes it impossible to release the assembled state of both connector covers with the locking pin 836 connecting the connector covers 830 and 837. At the same time, the connector covers 830 and 837 are fixed so as not to be removable from the upper case 820b.

  Further, by cutting the thin portion 835 formed on the connector covers 830 and 837 with a tool such as a nipper N, the connector covers 830 and 837 are divided into 830a to 830c and 837a to 837c as shown in FIG. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be released.

  Instead of the connector cover 837, a connector cover 837 ′ having an edge portion 832a that covers the locking hole 832 may be used as shown in the one-dot broken line in FIG. The edge portion 832a facilitates the mounting operation of the locking pin 836, and the connector cover can be more firmly attached using a longer locking pin having a longer diameter.

[Modification 8]
88 and 89 are perspective views showing the structure of the substrate case 840 and the connector covers 850 and 857 in Modification 8. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the board case 840 in the modification 8 includes a lower case 840a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 840b that covers the upper part of the lower case 840a. Each of the lower case 840a and the upper case 840b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) like the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment, and the corresponding sealing pieces are connected to each other by a one-way screw or the like. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  The connector cover 850 has a length that can cover the board-side connector 620a. Similar to the connector cover 830 described as the modified example 7, the engagement holes 851, 851, the notches 894, 894, and the ribs 8501, 8501 is formed, and a long hole 858 is formed at the center.

  The connector cover 857 has a length that can cover the connector cover 850, and similarly to the connector cover 837 described as the modified example 7, the upper surface has a locking hole 852, a long hole 854, and a thin portion 855. However, a notch 894 (see FIG. 90) is formed on the rear surface, and both the front surface and the bottom surface are completely open. Further, at the front center position of the connector cover 857, a protruding piece 853 having a flange at the tip and inserted into the long hole 858 of the connector cover 850 is formed.

  Next, a method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector and a method for canceling the cable side connector in Modification 8 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the connector cover 850 is fitted into the board-side connector 620a with the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a. At this time, the connector cover 850 is elastically deformed into a substantially C shape, and both ribs 8501 and 8501 of the connector cover 850 are disposed in the gap between the board-side connector 620a and the claw 6101 of the cable-side connector 610a. The board-side connector 620a is sandwiched between both ribs 8501 and 8501 of the cover 850. As a result, the connector cover 850 is temporarily fixed to the upper case 840b.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 89, the connector cover 857 is fitted into the connector cover 850 from above the connector cover 850. As a result, the protruding piece 853 of the connector cover 857 is inserted into the long hole 858 of the connector cover 850, and the flange at the tip of the protruding piece 853 is locked to the bottom of the long hole 858. Thereby, compared with the modification 7, it becomes possible to fix connector covers more firmly. In addition, the locking holes 852 and 852 and the locking holes 851 and 851 of the connector cover 850 are in communication with each other, and the locking pins 856 are attached to the communicating locking holes 852 and 851.

  The locking pin 856 is a member in which a locking claw 859 whose tip can be elastically deformed inward is formed in the same manner as the locking pin 720 already described as the first modification. By inserting the 859 side into the locking hole 851 and the locking hole 852, the locking claw 859 is elastically deformed inward as shown in the enlarged sectional view of FIG. 90, and the head of the locking pin 856 is connected to the connector. By inserting the cover 857 until it is buried in the concave groove, the elastic deformation of the locking claw 859 is released, and the assembled state of both connector covers cannot be released with the locking pin 856 connecting the connector covers 850 and 857. At the same time, the connector covers 850 and 857 are fixed so as not to be removable from the upper case 840b.

  Further, by cutting the thin portion 855 formed in the connector covers 850 and 857 with a tool such as a nipper N, the connector covers 850 and 857 are divided into 850a to 850c and 857a to 857c as shown in FIG. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be released.

  Next, specific examples for restricting the connection / disconnection between the gaming electronic component and the cable will be described as [specific example 1] to [specific example 3]. Here, the start lever 7 is described as an example of an electronic component for gaming, but the specific example described below is applicable to any of the electronic components for gaming described in the above embodiment. Applicable. Further, in the following description, it is assumed that the wiring is extended from the start lever 7 without a connector, but in each specific example described below, the start lever 7 and the wiring are connected via a connector. It can also be applied when connected.

[Specific Example 1]
92 and 93 are perspective views showing the structures of the start lever 7 and the covers 860 and 867 in the first specific example.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the start lever 7 includes a grip ball 7a and a shaft 7b, and the cable 601c described in the above embodiment is connected to the mounting portion 7c of the shaft 7b.

  A cover for covering the attachment portion 7 c is composed of an upper cover 860 and a lower cover 867.

  The upper cover 860 has a surface facing the shaft 7b (hereinafter referred to as a “rear surface”) and a bottom surface, and an upper surface of the cylindrical shaft 7b up to a predetermined length including the mounting portion 7c. The shape is a semi-circular shape that can be inserted. Further, thin portions 865 are respectively formed by forming long holes 864 and 864 on both sides of the semicircular shape on the upper surface of the upper cover 860. Further, a thin portion is formed by forming long holes 864 and 864 on the surface of the upper cover 860 located on the front side in the figure (hereinafter referred to as “front surface”) at positions corresponding to the long holes 864 on the upper surface. 865 is formed. Further, locking holes 861 and 861 in which stepped portions capable of accommodating screw heads are formed in positions near the long holes 864 and 864 of the upper cover 860.

  The lower cover 867 has box-shaped protrusions 8671 formed with locking holes 862 formed on the left and right sides, and a wall 868 for covering the mounting portion 7c of the shaft 7b on the inside and a wiring for drawing out the wiring 601c at the bottom. A lead-out portion 863 is formed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95, a method for restricting and removing the cable connected to the gaming electronic component in the specific example 1 and a method for releasing the same will be described.

  92, with the cable 601c connected to the attachment portion 7c, the shaft 7b of the start lever 7 is inserted into the upper cover 860, and then the cable 601c is pulled out to the front side in the figure. The lower cover 867 is fitted from the bottom surface of the upper cover 860. Thereby, the mounting portion 7c of the start lever 7 is covered with the upper cover 860 and the lower cover 867 in a state where the cable is connected. Further, since the locking holes 861 and 861 of the upper cover and the locking holes 862 and 862 of the lower cover 867 are in communication with each other, the locking pins 866 are attached to the communicating locking holes 861 and 862. To do.

  The locking pin 866 is a member formed with a locking claw 869 whose tip can be elastically deformed inward, like the locking pin 720, and the locking claw 869 side of the locking pin 866 is a locking hole. As shown in the enlarged sectional view of FIG. 94, by inserting the engaging claw 869 side of the engaging pin 866 into the engaging hole 861 and the engaging hole 862, The cover 860 and the lower cover 867 are detachably attached, and accordingly, the attachment portion 7c of the start lever 7 is covered with the upper cover 860 and the lower cover 867 so as not to be detached while being connected to the cable. As a result, the cable 601c cannot be removed from the attachment portion 7c unless the connection state of the upper and lower covers is destroyed.

  Further, by cutting the thin portion 865 formed in the covers 860 and 867 with a tool such as a nipper N, the upper cover 860 is divided into 860a to 850c as shown in FIG. 95, and the cable 601c is connected from the attachment portion 7c. Can be removed.

  Instead of the upper cover 860, an upper cover 860 ′ in which an edge 861a covering the locking hole 861 is formed may be used as shown in a one-dot broken line in FIG. The edge 861a facilitates the mounting operation of the locking pin 866, and the upper cover and the lower cover can be more firmly attached using a longer locking pin having a longer diameter.

[Specific Example 2]
96 and 97 are perspective views showing structures of the start lever 7 and the covers 870 and 877 in the second specific example.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the structure of the start lever 7 is the same as in the first specific example. The cover for covering the attachment portion 7 c is composed of an upper cover 870 and a lower cover 877.

  The upper cover 870 has the same shape as that of the upper cover 860 of the first specific example, and the thin portions 875 are formed on the upper surface and the front surface by forming the long holes 874 and 874, respectively. Further, locking holes 871 and 871 are formed at positions near the long holes 874 and 874.

  The lower cover 877 has a standing wall 8771 formed with a locking hole 872 on the left and right front sides of the drawing (see FIG. 97), and a wall 878 for covering the mounting portion 7c of the shaft 7b on the inside at the bottom. A wiring lead-out portion 873 for drawing out 601c is formed.

  Unlike the first specific example, the locking hole 872 in which the step portion capable of accommodating the screw head is formed is provided not on the upper cover 870 side but on the lower cover 877 side.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99, a method for restricting and removing the cable connected to the game electronic component in the specific example 2 and a method for releasing the same will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 96, with the cable 601c connected to the attachment portion 7c, the shaft 7b of the start lever 7 is inserted into the upper cover 870, and then the cable 601c is pulled out to the front side in the drawing. The lower cover 877 is fitted from the bottom surface of the upper cover 870 so that the left and right standing walls 8771 where the locking holes 872 are formed are disposed on the outer front surface of the upper cover 870. As a result, the mounting portion 7c of the start lever 7 is covered with the upper cover 870 and the lower cover 877 while being connected to the cable. Further, since the locking holes 872 and 872 of the lower cover 877 and the locking holes 871 and 871 of the upper cover are in communication with each other, the locking pins 876 are attached to the communicating locking holes 871 and 872. To do.

  The locking pin 876 is a member similar to the locking pin 866 of the first specific example. As shown in the enlarged cross-sectional view of FIG. 98, the locking pin 876 is connected to the locking claw 879 side with the locking hole 871 and the locking pin. By inserting into the hole 872, the upper cover 870 and the lower cover 877 are detachably mounted, and accordingly, the mounting portion 7c of the start lever 7 is connected by the upper cover 870 and the lower cover 877 while being connected to the cable. Covered non-removable. As a result, the cable 601c cannot be removed from the attachment portion 7c unless the connection state of the upper and lower covers is destroyed.

  Further, by cutting the thin portion 875 formed in the covers 870 and 877 with a tool such as a nipper N, the upper cover 870 is divided into 870a to 870c as shown in FIG. 99, and the cable 601c is connected to the attachment portion 7c. Can be removed.

  Instead of the lower connector 877, a lower cover 877 ′ in which an edge portion 872a covering the locking hole 872 is formed may be used as shown in a one-dot broken line in FIG. The edge portion 872a facilitates the mounting operation of the locking pin 876, and the upper cover and the lower cover can be more firmly attached using a longer locking pin having a longer diameter.

[Specific Example 3]
100 and 101 are perspective views showing structures of the start lever 7 and the covers 880 and 887 in the third specific example.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the structure of the start lever 7 is the same as that of the first specific example. Further, the cover for covering the attachment portion 7 c is composed of an upper cover 880 and a lower cover 887.

  The upper cover 880 has the same shape as the upper cover 860 of the first specific example, and the thin holes 885 are formed on the upper surface and the front surface by forming the long holes 884 and 884, respectively. However, unlike the specific example 1, the bottom surface is not opened, and locking holes 881 and 881 (see FIG. 101) are formed on the bottom surface.

  The lower cover 887 is the same as the first specific example in that a wall 888 for covering the attachment portion 7c of the shaft 7b on the inner side and a wiring lead-out portion 883 for drawing out the wiring 601c are formed. However, unlike the specific example 1, the standing wall in which the locking hole is formed is not formed, but instead, the locking pin having the locking claws 889 and 889 that are elastically deformable inwardly, respectively. 886 and 886 are erected.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103, a method for restricting and removing the cable connected to the gaming electronic component in the specific example 3 and a method for releasing the same will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, with the cable 601c connected to the mounting portion 7c, the shaft 7b of the start lever 7 is inserted into the upper cover 880, and then the cable 601c is pulled out to the front side in the drawing. In this state, the lower cover 887 is fitted from the bottom surface of the upper cover 880. Thus, the mounting portion 7c of the start lever 7 is covered with the upper cover 880 and the lower cover 887 in a state where the cable is connected. Further, the locking pins 886 and 886 of the lower cover 887 are inserted into the locking holes 881 and 881 of the upper cover.

  As shown in the enlarged sectional view of FIG. 102, by inserting the locking claw 889 side of the locking pin 886 into the locking hole 881, the upper cover 880 and the lower cover 887 are mounted in a non-removable manner. The mounting portion 7c of the start lever 7 is covered with the upper cover 880 and the lower cover 887 so as not to be detached while being connected to the cable. As a result, the cable 601c cannot be removed from the attachment portion 7c unless the connection state of the upper and lower covers is destroyed.

  Further, by cutting the thin portion 885 formed on the upper cover 880 with a tool such as a nipper N, the upper cover 880 is divided into 880a to 880c as shown in FIG. 103, and the cable 601c is disconnected from the attachment portion 7c. It becomes possible to remove.

  Here, in the above embodiment, the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the substrate case 200 are sealed and the substrate case 200 is fixed to the mounting base 250 using one-way screws. You may perform using other members, such as using the latch pin which becomes immovable.

[Modifications related to setting change and RT status]
When the setting change process shown in FIG. 28 is performed in the RT state, the game state after the setting change may return to the RT state. For this purpose, for example, information indicating that RT is being performed, information indicating the type of RT (advantageous RT, unfavorable RT), information indicating the number of remaining games of RT, and the like when RT is being performed. An information storage area to be stored is provided in the RAM 41c so that the stored information in the information storage area is not erased even if the processing of Sa18 to Sa23 shown in FIG. Then, when the process proceeds to the game process via Sa23 in FIG. 26, the state is returned to the RT state based on the stored information in the information storage area.

  In addition, the information storage area includes at least the current number of credits, the number of bets, information on the internal winning flag established, and the end of the payout process according to the display result after detecting the start lever operation. ), Information indicating that it is in a big bonus (or regular bonus, or big bonus and regular bonus) is not stored, and it shifts to the setting change mode and the winning probability is set. Then, when returning to the game state again, these pieces of information may be initialized. That is, when the setting change process is performed, if the gaming state before the setting is a big bonus (or regular bonus), the gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state, while the setting state before the setting is performed. When the gaming state is the RT state, the state is returned to the RT state. In this case, the information indicating whether or not the normal gaming state is further stored in the information storage area, and the normal gaming state when the gaming state before the setting change processing is the normal gaming state You may return to.

  In addition, the operation units (start lever 7, single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, settlement switch 10, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, selection switch 56, determination switch 57, setting key switch 37 provided in the slot machine 1 are provided. The RT state may be initialized when a specific operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the like is detected (initialization of storage in the information storage area). For example, the specific operation may be a combination of predetermined operations of two or more operation units. However, the procedure may be completely different from the operation related to the setting change. The operation procedure may be a combination of other operations including some operations.

[Modified example related to recovery to RT state]
The RAM 41c has an information storage area for storing information indicating that RT is being performed, information indicating the type of RT (advantageous RT, disadvantageous RT), information indicating the number of remaining games of the RT, and the like. When returning to the RT state based on the information stored in the information storage area by a backup power source or the like, the RT state may be notified together with the type of the RT state (advantageous RT, unfavorable RT). . In this case, as a notification device, a dedicated notification device may be provided, or a display device used in the progress of the game, such as the credit display device 11, the game auxiliary display device 12, the payout display device 13, or the liquid crystal display device 51. May be used.

[Modified example related to recovery to RT state]
In the above-described embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the state before power interruption is restored, and when the special role is won before the power interruption, the special role is won by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. The announcement of the special role is always informed by the announcement effect. Here, in place of the liquid crystal display 51, other indicators used in the progress of the game, such as the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, and the liquid crystal display 51, are used as the notification device. May be.

[Modification regarding generation and termination of RT state]
(1) Generation of RT After the end of the big bonus or regular bonus, the player may enter the RT state. In this case, for example, when it is determined in Sk7 of FIG. 41 that the BB end condition is satisfied, the BB flag is cleared in Sk8, and the RT flag indicating that the gaming state is RT is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the RT flag is set during the internal lottery process. When the RT flag is set, the replay combination is randomly drawn at the winning rate corresponding to the RT.

(2) Termination of RT after elapse of a predetermined period RT may be terminated when a predetermined period elapses after entering the RT state. For example, it is conceivable to terminate RT when a predetermined maximum number of continued games (for example, 100 games, but not limited to this) is consumed after entering the RT state. As described above, when the RT end condition is defined by the maximum number of continued games, for example, a count counter (provided in the storage area of the RAM 41c) for counting the number of games is set when the RT flag is set. The count counter value is subtracted. Then, when the value of the count counter reaches 0, the RT flag is cleared and the RT state is terminated.

(3) Termination of RT due to establishment of a predetermined game condition before the predetermined period has elapsed (falling down winning combination)
If the predetermined game condition is satisfied before the predetermined maximum number of continued games is consumed, the RT end condition may be satisfied at that stage. As the gaming conditions, for example, establishment of a predetermined symbol combination, in particular, generation of a winning by a predetermined winning combination, etc. can be considered.

  For example, as the “predetermined winning combination” that establishes the RT termination condition, one (1) winning combination (first specific winning combination) and two (2) winning combinations (first) in the present embodiment It is conceivable to apply each of the two specific grants). For example, when it is determined in the winning determination process that a winning combination of one (1) or two (2) winning combinations is established, or when a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination is set, the RT flag is cleared. That's fine.

  By configuring in this way, a player who desires to continue the RT state is required to perform a pushing operation so as not to generate a prize by one (1) or two (2) winning combination during RT. As a result, technical intervention occurs, and a slot machine with higher preference can be provided. Hereinafter, since the winning combination of 1 (1) and 2 (2) is a winning combination that satisfies the RT termination condition, “first falling winning combination” and “second falling winning combination” respectively. Also called.

  In addition, as described above, the combination of symbols constituting one (1) winning combination (first falling winning combination) is “blue 7-red 7-watermelon”, while one (2) The combination of symbols constituting the winning combination (second falling winning combination) is “red 7-blue 7-watermelon”. In this embodiment, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Red 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line. The combination of the second roll-off winning combination in a position where the “Red 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing the stop operation is possible within the range where the “Blue 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line Since the “Red 7” symbol and “Blue 7” symbol constituting the first drop-in winning combination are respectively arranged, there is a stop operation position where the “Red 7” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol can be aimed at simultaneously. not exist.

  Therefore, if the player can know during the RT which one of the first or second winning combination will be intentionally removed the winning combination. By performing the pushing operation (although it is necessary to succeed), it is possible to reliably prevent the RT from being terminated midway.

(4) Announcement of winning the winning combination (assist time)
As described above, the slot machine may be provided with an “assist function” for notifying the player when the first or second falling winning combination is won during RT.

  For example, when the RT flag is set (during RT), when the first or second winning combination is won in the internal lottery process, a winning notification flag corresponding to the winning combination that was won internally is set. . Then, at a stage where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are simultaneously rotated and the game is started (before the reel stop operation becomes effective), a predetermined alarm (for example, the liquid crystal display 4, the effect effect LED 52, the speaker) 53, 54, reel LED 55, etc.), the main control unit 41 performs control to output a control signal for a predetermined notification corresponding to the falling winning combination.

  The “assist function” may be activated in each game as long as RT continues, but it may be activated only for a certain period. Hereinafter, a period in which the assist function is valid is referred to as “assist time (AT)”. For example, the assist time (AT) in which the assist function is effective may be configured to end when the predetermined number of games are consumed after entering the RT.

  Or you may comprise so that AT may change according to a game condition. For example, in RT, it is conceivable that the right to play an AT-attached RT game is added by one game or a predetermined number of games of 2 or more each time a falling winning combination is won internally. Specifically, an RT game without AT is provided from the first entry into RT until the winning combination is won internally, and at a stage where the falling winning combination is won internally during RT, a predetermined number of AT games are provided. The right to play the attached RT game is granted, and after the next game, the AT attached RT game is continuously provided until the predetermined number of games is consumed.

  For this purpose, for example, an AT game number counting counter for counting the number of games capable of performing an RT game with AT is provided in the storage area of the RAM 41c. A count value corresponding to the predetermined game number is added to the number counter. When it is determined that the RT flag is set during the internal lottery process, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT game number counting counter is 1 or more. 1 is subtracted, and an internal lottery process is performed. When an internal winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the incoming winning combination is notified by the above control procedure.

  Alternatively, every time a game result that avoids a winning by the falling winning combination (hereinafter simply referred to as “falling winning avoidance game result”) is generated even though the falling winning combination is elected internally in RT, an AT is attached. It is conceivable that the right to play the RT game is added to one game or a predetermined number of games of two or more. Specifically, an RT game without AT is provided from the first entry into RT until the falling winning combination is won internally, and then the falling winning combination is internally won during RT and the game The player is given the right to play an RT game with AT for a specified number of games at the stage when the result of the drop-in prize avoidance game is avoided consciously or accidentally by the player's pressing operation. Then, after the next game, the RT game with AT is continuously provided until the predetermined number of games is consumed.

  For this purpose, for example, an AT game number counting counter for counting the number of games that can play an RT game with AT is provided in the storage area of the RAM 41c. A count value corresponding to the predetermined number of games is added to the counter. When it is determined that the RT flag is set during the internal lottery process, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT game number counting counter is 1 or more. 1 is subtracted, and an internal lottery process is performed. When an internal winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the incoming winning combination is notified by the above control procedure.

  The memory of the number of games that can play an RT game with AT may be cleared each time an RT termination condition (maximum number of continued games is consumed or the predetermined game condition) is satisfied. You may comprise so that it may be carried over so that it may be used effectively sometimes. For example, in order to carry over the memory, the RT flag is cleared when the RT termination condition is satisfied, while the AT game number counting counter (the result of the overturning award avoidance game) is maintained without being cleared. . If the count value of the AT game number counter is 1 or more at the time of RT entry next time, the RT game with AT is provided as described above.

  With this structure, even if the right to play an RT game with an AT remains, even if a winning by a falling winning combination occurs and the RT ends, the player will be able to You can exercise your rights effectively.

  In addition, as described above, when it is configured to carry over the right to play an RT game with AT, the right to play an RT game with AT in advance using a driving tool or the like (the value of the AT game number counter) ) Is set, there is a possibility that an illegal act such as providing a game will be performed. However, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, in order to connect an unauthorized tool such as a driving tool, it is necessary to release the connection of the connector. Even if the right to perform an RT game with AT illegally (the value of the AT game count counter) is set, the data in the RAM 41c is initialized by releasing the connection of the connector in order to replace it with a regular connector. Therefore, the slot machine in which the right to play an RT game with an AT using the driving tool (the value of the AT game count counter) is set is provided to the player at the start of business at the amusement store. It is possible to prevent such illegal sales.

  In addition, RT games that end with the occurrence of a winning by the first or second falling winning combination are aligned with the internal winning winning combination when the first or second falling winning combination is won internally. Although there is a game characteristic that an operation that is not required is required, in order to further improve the game characteristic, “the combination of the first falling winning combination symbol” and “the second falling winning combination symbol” It is desirable that the symbols on the reels be arranged so that there is no stop operation position where none of the “combinations” are aligned. In this case, for example, in the left reel, each symbol is arranged so that there is no specific stop operation position where neither the “red 7” symbol nor the “blue 7” symbol can be drawn. Can be considered.

  With this configuration, after entering the RT, the first or second operation can be performed by operating at a specific stop operation position regardless of whether the first or second falling winning combination is won. It is possible to prevent the player from performing an act of removing the winning in the second falling winning combination. Further, by providing the above-mentioned RT game with an AT in this way, the usefulness of the AT function can be enhanced.

  In the embodiment described above, a slot machine is applied as a gaming machine. May be.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the regular bonus is activated simultaneously with the shift to the big bonus, and it is determined whether the regular bonus is activated for each game during the big bonus. If it is determined that the regular bonus is not activated, the regular bonus is activated again, so that the regular bonus is always controlled while the big bonus is activated. For this reason, it is only necessary to control the regular bonus while the big bonus is in operation, so that the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. Since it is determined whether or not the game is executed, the control program for each game in the big bonus can be made common regardless of whether or not the regular bonus is in operation, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Further, while the big bonus is in operation, the regular bonus is always controlled so that the medals can be increased fastest during the big bonus. Therefore, the regular bonus operates in accordance with the JACIN winning as in the conventional case. It is possible to increase the interest of the player with the shift to the big bonus. In particular, the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus reaches the specified value (466 in this embodiment) without ending the big bonus at the number of transitions to the regular bonus as in this embodiment. When the end condition is satisfied, the number of net increase in the big bonus can be increased, so that the interest of the player accompanying the shift to the big bonus can be further increased.

  In the present embodiment, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is inactive, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus is not activated. If not activated, the regular bonus is activated. A determination for reactivating the bonus, that is, an unnecessary determination is not performed.

  In this embodiment, after the operation of the regular bonus starts, the number of games controlled by the regular bonus reaches the specified number of games (12 games in the present embodiment) or the specified number of times (in this embodiment) (In the form, 8 times) The winning is ended when a winning occurs, but the regular bonus may be ended under only one of the conditions. It may end only when a winning prize is generated. Alternatively, the total number of medals paid out and the net increase in the regular bonus (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of medals consumed for setting the bet number from the total number of medals paid out) may reach the specified number. However, the process may be terminated when any one of these conditions is satisfied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the operation of the big bonus is started, the big bonus is ended when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus reaches a specified value (466 in this embodiment). However, the big bonus may be terminated under other conditions, for example, the net increase in the number of medals in the big bonus (the total number of medals consumed for setting the number of bets is subtracted from the total number of medals paid out) The number of games controlled by the big bonus reaches the specified number of games, the number of transitions to the regular bonus reaches the specified number, and the regular The Big Bonus end condition is met when the bonus ends, etc., or Big Bo Vinegar termination conditions may be established.

  Further, in this embodiment, during the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. At the same time as the transition to the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated. At the end of the regular bonus, the regular bonus may be activated again to always control the regular bonus while the big bonus is active. While it is necessary to control only the regular bonus, the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and it is necessary to determine whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. The process to reactivate the regular bonus only when the regular bonus ends Because it is sufficient, unnecessary processing is not performed in a state where the control of the regular bonus is not completed.

  Also, in this case, at the end of the regular bonus, before operating the regular bonus again, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If not, it is preferable to activate the regular bonus again. By doing so, the regular bonus is not reactivated even though the big bonus ends immediately.

  In addition, after the transition to the big bonus, the first regular bonus may be triggered when a specific winning occurs, and the subsequent regular bonus may be reactivated at the end of the regular bonus.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB signal is stopped while the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and the output waiting time has elapsed. When the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops and the output waiting time has elapsed in this state. Thus, the output of the RB signal is resumed. For this reason, it is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by the external device that has received the RB signal, for example, whether or not the slot machine is operating normally from the externally output signal. Can be properly implemented with an external device.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of stops whose stop positions (display results) are uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (area assigned to the number of steps from the reel reference position). When all the reels are rotating among the control tables, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When any of the reels is already stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop control uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel are selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and the gaming state, the internal winning state, the reel stop When all the conditions (and stop positions (display results) of the stopped reels) are the same, the reel stop control is performed based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. Therefore, it is necessary to further select any one stop control table from a plurality of stop control tables for one internal winning state by a lottery different from the internal lottery (for example, a lottery for reel control). Therefore, the control for stopping the reel does not become complicated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of starting the rotation of the reels, for each reel, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control table The reel stop control is performed according to the following, and each time the reel is stopped, for each spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop position of the stopped reel, that is, any one reel is Select and select a stop control table that is uniquely defined for the combination of stop positions of stopped reels when stopped, or stop positions of two stopped reels when any two reels are stopped The reel stop control is performed in accordance with the stop control table. When the reels stop, for the spinning reel, select the stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel, and select the selected stop The reel stop control is performed according to the control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), no new stop control table is selected and all the reels are rotating. The stop control of the remaining reels may be performed according to the stop control table selected when any one reel stops in the state.

  In addition, when any one of the reels is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reels, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop position of the stopped reels. Select and perform reel stop control according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop position of the last stopped reel may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when any of the reels is already stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the reel stop state, and the stopped position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. The reel stop control is performed in accordance with the set stop control table. When any of the reels is already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state, the reel stop state, The reel stop control may be performed according to a stop control table uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the stopped reel, and in this way, the gaming state and the internal winning state are the same. Even if the stop position (stop symbol) of the stopped reel is the same, the stop operation position of the stopped reel is different Because there may be different stop control table is applied, it can display the results of the reel it more versatile.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the stop control table is not newly selected and all The remaining reels may be controlled to stop according to the stop control table selected when any one of the reels stops while the other reels are rotating.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first It is also possible to select a stop control table that is uniquely determined for the stop operation position of the reel that has stopped last or the reel that has stopped last, and to perform stop control of the reel according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any two reels are stopped, the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is uniquely set for the spinning reel. A predetermined stop control table is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. For example, when any two reels stop, Stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, and the stop operation position of the remaining reels of the stopped reels And stop control of the reels may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, an internal winning state for each gaming state and a stop control table uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel are selected for the spinning reel. Then, when any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop operation position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, the remaining reels of the stopped reels A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop operation position may be selected, and reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in these cases, the stop operation position of the reel that has been stopped is determined in an area in which the 1/2 symbol fluctuates, that is, in a unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates, and is unique to the stop operation position. The reel stop control is performed according to a predetermined stop control table, that is, a different stop control table can be selected for a different number of steps within a range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if the stop position of the stopped reel is the same and the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, it is applied to other reels. Since the stop control table can be changed, the display results of each reel can be further diversified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of frames to be drawn (a stop position when a stop operation is detected in the range) for each of a plurality of consecutive step number ranges (in this embodiment, four steps each having one symbol change). Since the stop control of the reel is performed using the stop control table uniquely determined), the capacity of the table creation data for creating the stop control table can be greatly reduced.

  In the present embodiment, a stop control table is used in which the number of frames to be drawn is uniquely determined for each unit of the range of the range in which one symbol fluctuates. The reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined for each region, that is, a unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates. That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which different stop positions are set for different number of steps within a range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if it is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, the display result derived by the different timing of the stop operation can be changed. The display result of the reel can be derived in such a manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery, or when only one (1) is won, region numbers 4 to 8 or region number 10 shown in FIG. When a stop operation is made at any timing within the range of -14, that is, when the "Blue 7" symbol constituting the combination of one (1) cannot be pulled in even within a maximum of four frames, that is, one When (1) could not be won, and if any of the roles are not won by internal lottery (losing), it will not be derived, and “ "Replay Watermelon Bell", 8-10 symbols "Bell Red 7 Bell" can be derived, if any bonus is won by internal lottery, or one (2) Is selected, the timing of any one of the area numbers 6 to 8 or the area numbers 17 to 21 shown in FIG. 12, that is, the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2) When a stop operation is performed at a timing that cannot be drawn even within the range of up to 4 frames, that is, when one (2) cannot be won, and any of the winning combinations are not won by internal lottery (losing) It is possible to derive the “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols that are not derived from Therefore, by deriving the display results constituting these chance eyes, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the special role has been won.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery and any other combination is not won, and when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, And when only one (2) is won in the normal gaming state, the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance eye when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12, 13 "Replay Watermelon Bell" or "Bell Red 7 Bell" of the 8th to 10th symbols is derived as the display result, but if no role is won (losing), the region number 6 , 7, 12 and 13 no matter when the stop operation is detected, “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of No. 2-4 symbol or “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of No. 8-10 symbol is displayed. Be derived as Therefore, when a bonus is won by internal lottery, or only one (1) is won and a stop operation is performed at a timing when one (1) cannot be won, or one (2) ) Only, and when the stop operation is performed at a timing when one (1) cannot be won, the stop operation is performed at the same timing in a state where no winning combination is won by internal lottery. It is possible to derive the display result that constitutes the chance eye that is not derived even if it is made, so the display result that constitutes the chance eye is derived, so that the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus is Can be increased.

  In addition, when any of the winning combinations are not won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal times, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, and any bonus is obtained by internal lottery. Except for the case where No. is won, chances can be derived by winning one (1) or one (2). For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and when any reel is already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. Even if reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, chances can be derived at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. Become.

  In the present embodiment, when any combination is not won in the normal gaming state (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye is derived regardless of the stop operation detected at any timing. There is no stop control table, but for example, if any role is not won in the normal gaming state (losing), whether any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, The “blue 7” symbols that make up the combination of one (1) are derived on any winning line for fewer stop operation positions (area numbers) than when only one (1) is won. The display result that constitutes the chance eye derived when the stop operation is performed at a timing that is not performed is specified, and any bonus is won in the normal gaming state Or “Red 7” symbols that make up the combination of 1 (2) for any stop operation position (area number) that is less than when only 1 (2) is won. Alternatively, a stop control table that specifies a display result that constitutes a chance to be derived when a stop operation is performed at a timing that is not derived may be created as a stop control table for the left reel. As a result, at a timing when a bonus is won by internal lottery, 1 (1) or 1 (2) is won, and 1 (1) or 1 (2) won cannot be won. When a stop operation is performed, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes the chance eye at a higher rate than when no role is won by internal lottery, so the chance eye is derived. This can increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle In the state where the reel is still rotating, regardless of the display result of the reel that has already stopped, the display result that constitutes the chance eye that is not derived if any role is not won (losing) In the normal gaming state, when only one (1) is elected, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating, If the "Blue 7" symbol that constitutes one (1) combination on the reel winning line is not stopped, or one (1) combination is constituted on the left reel winning line “Blue 7” symbol is stopped, but “Blue 7” symbol on the left reel is stopped on the winning line. When an operation is performed, or when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel has already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating, and the left reel is won. If the “Red 7” symbol that composes one (2) combination is not stopped on the line, or the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes one (2) combination is stopped on the winning line of the left reel However, when the stop operation is performed within a range where the “Blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (2) cannot be drawn on the winning line where “Red 7” is stopped on the left reel. If none of the roles are elected (losing) It is possible to derive the center reel display results configuration that is not derived, the chance eyes.

  In addition, if any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. Regardless of the display result of a reel that has already stopped in the state, if the winning combination has not been won (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye is derived to the right reel. When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, so that it is on the winning line of the left reel. If the "Blue 7" symbol that constitutes the combination of one (1) has not stopped, or at least the middle reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, If the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination on the reel winning line is not stopped, and only one (2) is won in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel If the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of two (1) on the winning line of the left reel has not stopped, and at least the middle reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating Is already stopped, and the right reel is still rotating, and the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes one (2) combination on the winning line of the middle reel has not stopped. If the winning combination is not won (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye can be derived to the right reel without being derived.

  That is, when one of the bonuses is won, or when one (1) or one (2) is won and one of the reels is stopped, and already one (1) or one It is possible to win one (1) or one (2) when one (2) cannot be won, or when any one reel is stopped. When one piece (1) or one piece (2) could not be won because the stop operation was made at a timing when the combination of one piece (1) or one piece (2) could not be derived, Since it is possible to derive the display results that make up the chance eyes that are not derived if they are not selected (losing), the display results that make up these chance eyes are derived, so The role won It is possible to increase the player's expectation for Rukoto.

  In addition, only one (1) or one (2) is won, and one of the winning lines on the left reel winning line is a symbol that constitutes a combination of one (1) or one (2). Even if it is not stopped at the top, one stop (1) or one (on the winning line of the left reel) because the stop operation was performed at a timing other than the timing at which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified. Even if the symbols constituting the combination 2) do not stop on any of the winning lines and the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, the display result constituting the chance eye on the middle reel or the right reel Can be derived and the opportunity for deriving the display result constituting the chance eye is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation for the bonus can be effectively enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery or when only one (1) or one (2) is won, any one reel is stopped. In the state, when one (1) or one (2) could not be won already, a stop operation is performed at the timing of a specific area number, and any combination is won by internal lottery. In this state, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance eye that is not derived even if a stop operation is performed at the same timing. , The player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus can be increased.

  In addition, when none of the winning combinations are won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal times, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. In any case, except when one of the bonuses is won by internal lottery, it is possible to derive a chance by winning one (1) or one (2). For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and when any reel is already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. Even if reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, chances can be derived at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. Become.

  In the present embodiment, if any combination is not won in the normal game state (losing), the chance that the stop operation is detected at any timing regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. A stop control table is generated in which the display result that constitutes the eye is not derived. For example, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), at least one When the reels are already stopped, there are fewer stop operation positions (areas) than when either bonus is won in the normal gaming state or only one (1) or one (2) is won The stop control table for specifying the display result constituting the chance number may be created as the stop control table for the left reel. As a result, a bonus has been won by internal lottery, or one (1) or one (2) has been won and at least one reel has been stopped, and already one (1) or one (2) When it is not possible to generate a prize, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes the chance eye at a higher rate than when no role is won by internal lottery, so the chance eye is derived. By doing so, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus can be enhanced.

  In this embodiment, the chance is not established when the display result is derived on the left reel, but when the display result is derived on any two reels or all reels (any winning combination) The chance chance is established when the display result is derived for any one reel, for example, 8 for the left reel. A display mode that can be realized only by deriving “bell, red 7, bell” of the 10th symbol may be applied as a chance.

  In addition, the maximum number of bets (3) that can be set for one game is set for one (1) and one (2) that can be used for deriving a chance when a prize cannot be won. This is a prize that involves paying out 3 or less (1) medals, which is the number of medals required to win, so one (1) or one (2) can be won and won by an internal lottery. Even if it is not, the player will not suffer a major disadvantage, and the winning probability of 1 (1) and 1 (2) will not greatly affect the payout rate of the slot machine 1, For example, it is possible to increase the chance that one (1) and one (2) winnings are allowed and increase the chances of deriving chances, effectively increasing the player's expectation for the bonus. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out with the winning of one (1) and one (2) is one required for setting the minimum number of bets for one game. Therefore, the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected.

  In the present embodiment, one medal is paid out to the player with the winning of one (1) and one (2). The number of medals to be paid out as a result of the occurrence is not limited to one, and the number of medals to be paid out with the occurrence of a specific award that can derive a chance is preferable, but at least for one game If the number of medals required for setting the maximum bet number (3 in the present embodiment) (three in this embodiment) or less is less than the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected. . In addition, for example, when the payout number differs depending on whether it stops on a plurality of pay lines like a cherry or stops on a single pay line, the payout number when a combination of combinations stops on a plurality of pay lines However, if the number of medals is less than the number of medals required to set the maximum bet number that can be set for one game (3 in the present embodiment), the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when only one (1) or one (2) is won by internal lottery, at a timing when one (1) or one (2) cannot be won. The number of stop operation positions (region numbers) for which the number of frames to be drawn specifying the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected is one (1) or one (2) Since the number of draw-in frames for which the display result that the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols stop on any of the winning lines is specified is larger than the number of the stop operation positions (area numbers) determined, one (1) When only 1) or 1 (2) is elected, a display result is derived in which the symbols constituting the combination of 1 (1) or 1 (2) stop on any winning line. 1 sheet (1 Alternatively, a display result constituting a chance eye derived when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won is derived, and one (1) is obtained by internal lottery. Or when only one (2) is elected, one symbol (1) rather than the symbols constituting the combination of the one (1) or one (2) being derived on any winning line ) Or one (2) cannot be won, and the display result that constitutes the chance to be derived when the stop operation is detected is more easily derived, so the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus A feeling can be heightened effectively.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the big bonus (2) is won by internal lottery or when one (1) is won, the “Blue 7” symbol is drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames. If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area number 18 among the timings that can be stopped on the winning line, it is not derived when no winning combination is won. If the 15th to 17th symbols “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”, that is, if one (1) combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, a display result that will lead to a chance chance will be derived. When any bonus is won by internal lottery or when one (2) is won, the “Red 7” symbol is drawn in a range of up to 4 frames. If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 12 and 13 among the timings that can be stopped on the winning line, it is derived when neither of the winning combinations is won. If there is no 8-10 symbol "Bell / Red 7 / Bell", that is, if the combination of 1 sheet (2) is not finally arranged on the winning line, the display result that the chance chance is established is derived. The symbols constituting one (1) or one (2) combination are derived on any winning line, and one (1) or one (2) is awarded. Even if a display result constituting a chance eye derived when a stop operation is detected at an impossible timing is not derived, the derived display result is awarded one (1) or one (2). Can If the display result which constitutes the chances eyes stop operation at the timing is derived even when it is detected, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the bonus generation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the big bonus (2) is won by internal lottery or only one (1) is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing of area number 18 shown in FIG. When detected, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols constituting the chance chance is derived as a display result, and one of the bonuses is won by internal lottery or one (2) In the case where only the player is elected, the “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols constituting the chance chance when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the range of the area numbers 12 and 13 shown in FIG. Is derived as a display result, but if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), even if a stop operation is detected at the timing of area number 18, No. 7 symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” is not derived as a display result, and any stop operation is detected at any timing within the range of area numbers 12 and 13 and “Bell” “Red 7 Bell” is not derived as a display result, so a bonus is won by internal lottery, or only one (1) or one (2) is won and one (1) Alternatively, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (2) can be won, it is derived even if the stop operation is performed at the same timing in a state where no winning combination is won by internal lottery. Since it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance chance that does not occur, the symbols constituting one (1) or one (2) combination are derived on any winning line and one (1) See also Even if the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won, the derived display result is one (1). Or, even if a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) can be won, if the display result constitutes a chance chance to be derived, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus can be increased it can.

  In the present embodiment, the common “blue 7” symbol is used as the symbol constituting the combination of one (1) and the symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2). The display result that constitutes the chance eye to be derived even when the stop operation is detected at the timing at which it is possible to win the “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of No. 17 symbol, that is, one (1) can be won. Thus, if the big bonus (2) is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing aimed at the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) on the middle reel and the right reel, In the game, the combination of big bonus (2) can be stopped on the winning line and won. Similarly, since the common “red 7” symbol is used as the symbol constituting the combination of one (2) and the symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1), 8-10. Even if a stop operation is detected at the timing at which the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, that is, one (2) can be won, a display result constituting a chance eye is derived. If the regular bonus or big bonus (1) is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing aimed at the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of the regular bonus or big bonus (1) on the middle reel, and the right reel Aimed at the “BAR” symbol that constitutes the regular bonus combination or the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the big bonus combination By performing the stop operation at timing, it is possible to prize is stopped in the game a combination of regular bonus or big bonus (1) on the pay line.

  Note that the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, as a symbol constituting the combination of one (1) and one (2), a symbol different from the symbol constituting the bonus combination is applied. Even in this case, the configuration symbol of one (1) or one (2) is derived on any winning line, and one (1) or one (2) is obtained. Even when a display result that constitutes a chance eye derived when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which winning cannot be made, the derived display result is one (1) or one (2) ) The display result that constitutes the chance item including the constituent symbol of (), that is, the chance eye that is derived even when the stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (1) or one (2) can be won. Do If a view result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  Also in this case, the display result constituting the chance item including one (1) or one (2) constituent symbols includes the symbols constituting the bonus combination, that is, one (1). Alternatively, it is preferable that the display configuration is such that one (2) configuration symbol and the bonus configuration symbol both stop on the winning line. Even in this case, one (1) or one (2) Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing when a winning can be won, a display result that constitutes a chance chance to be derived is derived, so that if the bonus is won, the middle reel and the right reel are also won. The bonus combination selected in the game is stopped on the winning line by making a stop operation at the timing of the symbols that make up the bonus combination. It can become.

  Further, in this embodiment, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), one (1) or one (2) is detected regardless of the timing when the stop operation is detected. Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing where a prize can be awarded, a stop control table is created in which a display result that constitutes a chance chance to be derived is not derived. If no combination is won in the game state (losing), if any bonus is won in the normal game state or only one (1) or one (2) is won The chance to be derived even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (1) or one (2) can be won with respect to a few stop operation positions (region numbers). A stop control table displaying results formed is identified may be created as a stop control table of the left reel. As a result, when a bonus is won by internal lottery, or when one (1) or one (2) is won, one piece (in a higher ratio than when no part is won by internal lottery) ( 1) or 1 (2) Since it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance chance to be derived even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) can be won, 1 (1) Or, when the symbols constituting the combination of one (2) are derived on any winning line and a stop operation is detected at a timing when one (1) or one (2) cannot be won Even when the display result constituting the chance chance to be derived is not derived, the stop operation is detected at a timing at which the derived display result can win one (1) or one (2). Place If the display results but that make up the chance eyes are derived, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  In addition, when no combination is won in the normal game state (losing), only one piece of the stop operation position for one symbol, that is, one of the region numbers 1 to 21 ( 1) or a stop control table for specifying a display result that constitutes a chance chance to be derived even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) can be won, as a stop control table for the left reel By creating, in the case of a loss, the display result that constitutes the chance eye is not drawn out on any winning line, whereas the bonus is won by internal lottery. Or when one (1) or one (2) is won, the display result constituting the chance eye may be drawn on one of the winning lines. Therefore, not only the display result constituting the chance eye is derived but also the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus is effective not only by drawing the chance eye on any winning line. Can be increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the left reel, a display mode (area number) in which the 16th “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (1) stops at any one of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel. 14-16, 15-17, 16-18) and a display mode in which the “red 7” design No. 9 constituting the combination of one sheet (2) stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel. Area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) are arranged beyond the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames, respectively, and the stop operation position at which the “red 7” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time When there is a reel stop operation always aiming at one of the symbols constituting the combination of one (1) or the combination of one (2), one (1) One of the two (2) can always be awarded However, since it becomes impossible to perform the stop operation at a timing at which the other combination can be won, and in this case, a chance chance can be derived, so one (1), one ( 2) Even if the reel stop operation is always performed aiming at one of the roles, it is possible to make a chance chance appear appropriately. In this case, the other of 1 (1) and 1 (2) Since it is not possible to determine whether or not the winning role has been won or whether the bonus has been won, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus by the appearance of the chance . In addition, even for highly skilled players who play games so as not to miss small roles, the percentage of chances derived is not extremely low, so games of all skill levels The expectation for the occurrence of the bonus can also be effectively enhanced for the person.

  In addition, since one (1) and one (2) have the same winning probability and the same number of medals at the time of winning, the combination of one (1) and one (2) There are few merits to stop the reel by performing only this, and as a result, the willingness to stop the operation of one of the one (1) and one (2) can be reduced, so it stops at various positions. There is a high possibility that the operation is performed, and the display results can be varied.

  In the present embodiment, the winning probability is the same and the number of medals to be paid out at the winning is the same as the first specific winning prize and the second specific winning prize from which chances can be derived when missed. 1 (1) and 1 (2) are applied, but it is sufficient if at least the symbols that make up the combination are arranged so that they cannot be aimed at the same time and a plurality of small combinations that cause missing are applied. A plurality of small combinations having different winning probabilities and payout numbers may be applied. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the value obtained by multiplying the winning probability and the number of payouts is approximate, and in this way, there is little merit of performing the reel stop operation by performing only one combination, and as a result Since the willingness to perform the stop operation aiming at the combination of the above can be reduced, the possibility of the stop operation being performed at various positions is increased, and the display results can be varied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the symbols constituting the combination of one (1) and the symbols constituting the combination of one (2), that is, a combination of the first specific prize and the second specific prize. The same number of symbols (one each) are arranged on the left reel. Of the symbols constituting one (1) combination and the symbols constituting one (2) combination, for example, 1 The number of symbols may be different, for example, one symbol composing the combination of sheets (1) and two symbols composing the combination of sheets (1). That is, one symbol may be derived at a higher rate than the other symbol among the symbols configuring one sheet (1) and the symbols configuring one sheet (2).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the 9th “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2), the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus (1) in the left reel is the upper stage of the left reel. The display mode (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stops at either the middle or lower level, the combination of one sheet (1) and the combination of big bonus (2) No. 16 “ The display mode (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18) where the “Blue 7” symbol stops at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel exceeds the maximum drawing range of 4 frames. Since there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the “Red 7” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol at the same time, the stop operation is performed aiming at the “Red 7” symbol, and the “Blue 7” symbol is placed on the winning line. Can't be derived The “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols that make up the chance eyes were derived, and finally the big bonus (1) or regular bonus (1) could not be won, and other roles If you didn't win, you won't know if you couldn't win one (1) or you couldn't win the big bonus (2) corresponding to the other "Blue 7" symbol, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols that make up the “Blue 7” symbol, the “Red 7” symbol cannot be derived on the winning line, and constitute the chance eye When the big bonus (2) could not be won and no other combination was won, the other (2) could not be won. Corresponds to "Red 7" design That regular bonus or big bonus (1) for what could not be winning is no longer unknown, and it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and the specific symbol constituting the combination of one (1) are respectively configured by the same “blue 7” symbol. The special symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1) and the specific symbol constituting the combination of one (2) are each composed of the same “red 7” symbol. The symbol and the specific symbol are composed of different symbols, and at least “Red 7” which constitutes a combination of regular bonus and big bonus (1) or “Blue 7” which constitutes a combination of big bonus (2) A display mode in which one of the symbols stops on the winning line (a display mode in which the “red 7” symbol or the “blue 7” symbol stops in any of the upper, middle and lower levels. ) And a display mode in which a specific symbol constituting a combination of one (1) or one (2) stops on the winning line (a display mode in which the specific symbol stops at any one of the upper, middle, and lower levels), As long as each of the frames is arranged to exceed the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames, the same actions and effects as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the left reel, the 6th “cherry” symbol constituting the combination of cherries from which more medals are paid out in the normal gaming state is the upper, middle, The display mode (area numbers 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) that stops at one of the lower tiers, and the 16th or 18th “blue 7” symbol that composes one (1) is the left reel The display mode (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) that stops at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages exceeds 4 frames, each of which is the maximum drawing range. There is no stop operation position that can aim at the “Cherry” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol at the same time, and only one of the symbols can be aimed at. Further, as described above, in the normal gaming state, when the cherry is won, more medals are paid out than when one (1) wins. No. 6 “Cherry”, which is a combination of cherries, cannot be stopped on the winning line at the timing aimed at the “Cherry” symbol, that is, the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination. It is possible to increase the willingness to perform the stop operation at a timing at which the symbol can be stopped on any of the winning lines.

  In addition, a maximum of 4 frames for the “Cherry” symbol of No. 6 and a stop operation position (area number 6 to 12) where the number of frames to be drawn to be stopped on any winning line is determined, and one (1) winning Stop operation position (region number) where the number of pull-in frames for stopping “Replay Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Bell, Red 7 and Bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is sometimes configured 4-8, region numbers 10-14) are partially overlapping, and when a stop operation is performed at these overlapping stop operation positions (region numbers 6-8, region numbers 10-12), If one (1) is selected, the 2-4 symbol “Replay Watermelon Bell” and the 8-10 symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” will stop. Become. For this reason, as the motivation to stop the 6th “cherry” symbol constituting the combination of cherries on any winning line is increased, one piece (1 ) Is won, it is possible to increase the rate at which the display results constituting the chance eyes are derived.

  In the present embodiment, cherry is applied as a special award that involves paying more medals than one (1) as the first specific award, but this is not restrictive. 1) It is sufficient that the winning combination is established by stopping the winning combination on the winning line at the same time as the symbols that cannot be aimed at the same time as the symbols constituting the combination. It may be established by stopping the corresponding symbol on the winning line of two or more reels.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a continuous effect is executed when a chance is derived. In other words, since the continuous performance is executed in relation to the derivation of the chances that are likely to be won by the bonus, the player's expectation for the bonus is expressed by both the reel display result and the performance related to the display result. Can be increased.

  Further, when the reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely specified from the stop operation position, for example, the player performs the stop operation at a timing other than the stop operation position at which the chance eye can be derived. In some cases, such as when playing a game, the percentage of chances derived is extremely reduced, but in this embodiment, a continuous effect lottery is executed in each game in the normal gaming state, and a continuous effect lottery is performed. Even if the winner is won, continuous production is executed. That is, even when the chance is not derived, if the continuous production lottery is won, the continuous production is executed. For this reason, even when the rate at which chance chances are derived is extremely reduced, a continuous effect is appropriately executed, so that a player's expectation on the bonus can be effectively increased.

  In this embodiment, when the chance is derived, that is, when the combination of the display results of all the reels becomes the chance, a continuous effect, that is, a specific effect is executed. For example, when applying the chance that is established when any one of the reels is stopped, when any one reel is stopped and the chance is established, the specific effect is executed from that point. You may do it.

  In the present embodiment, a continuous effect over a plurality of games is applied as a specific effect indicating the possibility of winning any of the bonuses, and the bonus is won over a plurality of games as well as one game. Although it is preferable that the player's expectation for the event can be maintained, for example, an effect that is executed only for the next game with a chance chance may be applied as a specific effect, or when the chance eye is derived Then, an effect executed until the next game starts may be applied as the specific effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a bonus or a winning combination other than the bonus is internally given on the condition that any winning combination is won by the internal lottery process before the display results of all the variable display areas are derived. You may make it alert | report that there exists a possibility of having won, By performing such alerting | reporting, a player's expectation with respect to generation | occurrence | production of a bonus can be maintained. In addition, such notification is performed on the condition that a prize other than one (1) as the first award winning or one (2) as the second award winning is won internally by the internal lottery process. By doing so, when one (1) or one (2) is won internally, there is no notification, and it is not possible to generate these winnings, and the possibility of chance chances being derived increases. , The player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, if the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the symbol to be stopped is selected according to the internal winning state and the timing of the stop operation, and the display result is derived to the reel. Is done. In other words, winning is generated not only by the internal winning state but also by the player's technical intervention of operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. As a result, collateral for restraint will be secured. In addition, regardless of the time that the player has not operated the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not yet been detected is detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. Since the display result is derived to the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, the player does not operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Thus, the display result is not derived only by the contingency element that time has passed, and it is possible to ensure the suppression of shooting characteristics.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the types of winning combinations, a small role accompanied by paying out medals, a re-playing role that does not require medals to be consumed in the next game, and a transition of the gaming state A special role with is defined. The special role is accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and depends on the gaming state at that time, so it cannot be said to be a basic role. The playability of a slot machine is not just playing a game, but the player earns medals based on the game results, so the small role that involves paying out medals by winning a prize is the most basic role. It can be said. Here, there are JAC, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and Bell as types of small roles, but in any gaming state other than JAC that wins with a small probability in the regular bonus Is also stipulated as the type of winning role. In this way, by defining the basic small combination as a winning combination regardless of the gaming state, the gameability becomes easy for the player to understand.

  In the regular bonus game state, a small role (especially a bell) is won with a high probability, and a large number of medals can be obtained, so the player's expectation is high. This regular bonus is not only transferred during the big bonus, but also when the regular bonus is won in the normal gaming state. For this reason, even when the player is in the normal gaming state, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the regular bonus, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, in the regular bonus, in addition to the cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and bell that are also set in the normal gaming state, JAC is also set as a small role. Thereby, the player's sense of expectation in the regular bonus can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in the regular bonus, in addition to the cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), the JAC display mode determined to be a prize in addition to the small part of the bell, it is configured by a combination of “bell-bell-watermelon” It is not used as a display mode for other roles. For this reason, the relationship between the display mode derived as the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the winning combination is clarified, and the gameability becomes easy for the player to understand.

  Further, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped after a maximum of 4 frames are drawn after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, and the symbols to be stopped can be selected from a range of 5 symbols. it can. Here, the symbols “bell” and “replay” are always arranged at intervals of 4 symbols or less on the left, middle and right reels, and the symbol “watermelon” is always 4 on the right reel. The bells, replays, and JACs constituted by these symbols are not missed when they are selected. In particular, the bells in the regular bonus will be won with a very high probability, but this can not be missed, so in the regular bonus the player will not actually have to look forward. , You can easily advance the game.

  As described above, the types of winning combinations that are subject to internal lottery for each gaming state are registered in the winning combination table by gaming state, but the number of judgment values that determine the winning probability of each combination is referred to from the determining table. Stored in the address. In the role-specific table, the number of payouts when each winning combination is also registered.

  In the role-specific table, the number of medals to be paid out is registered according to the number of bets, and when a cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), or a bell win occurs, the medals are paid out according to the number of bets. The number of sheets is set. Here, the number of bets in the regular bonus is fixed at 1, but the number of bets in the normal gaming state is fixed at 3. As a result, an appropriate number of medals can be paid out according to the gaming state simply by acquiring the number of medals to be paid out according to the number of bets. In addition, since it is not necessary to determine the gaming state when setting the payout number, the processing steps in the winning determination process are simplified. In addition, since the number of bets 1 corresponding to the regular bonus has more payouts at the time of winning than the number of bets 3, the player's expectation in the regular bonus is further enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

  In the role-specific table, for each of the cherries, 1 (1), 1 (2), and bell defined as winning combinations in any gaming state, the storage address of the judgment value number is registered for each bet number. Therefore, the number of determination values is acquired according to the number of bets. Here, the bet number in the regular bonus is fixed at 1, but the bet number in the gaming state other than the regular bonus is fixed at 3. Thereby, even by acquiring the number of determination values according to the number of bets, it is possible to perform an internal lottery of cherry, one (1), one (2), and a bell with a winning probability according to the gaming state. In addition, since it is not necessary to determine the gaming state when acquiring the determination value number, the processing steps in the internal lottery are simplified. Moreover, since the bet number 1 corresponding to the regular bonus has a higher probability of winning the bell than the bet number 3, the player's expectation in the regular bonus is further enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. Can do.

  In addition, the storage address of the judgment value number of each combination registered in the combination table may differ depending on the set value, but the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value. For the winning combination, the number of determination values is stored in common regardless of the set value. By storing the number of determination values in common in this way, the storage capacity required for that is reduced. However, in the role-specific table, even if the target number of the internal lottery is the same as the set bet number and the address storing the number of judgment values referenced according to the set value is different, it is stored at a different address. In some cases, the number of determination values is the same.

  In general, in the development stage, the simulation is performed while adjusting the number of determination values according to the set values for at least some of the combinations (that is, adjusting the winning probability of internal lottery). As the initial number of determination values, a different number of determination values is registered according to the set value. However, as a result of adjustment by simulation, the number of determination values when the set values are different may be the same. Although the same number of judgment values was registered as the initial number of judgment values according to the set value, the number of judgment values registered from the beginning may be used as it is depending on the result of simulation (result of simulation). The number of judgment values different from the initial value, that is, the number of judgment values may differ depending on the set value). Then, the number of determination values obtained with an appropriate result in the simulation in each case is selected as the number of determination values to be set in the mass production model.

  Here, even if the number of determination values adjusted by the simulation is the same regardless of the set value, the number of determination values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as that in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values from the development model in the mass production model, and the development from the initial design stage to the transition to the mass production model can be easily performed. Become.

  Further, the storage address of the determination value number of each combination registered in the combination table differs depending on the number of bets (1 or 3). For example, the number of determination values stored at different addresses May be the same.

  In the development model, it is normal to perform simulation while finely adjusting the judgment value data according to the number of bets (the same as when the initial number of judgment values is different) There may be cases). Here, even if the number of decision values adjusted by the simulation becomes the same regardless of the number of bets, the number of decision values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as the address assignment in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values from the development model in the mass production model, and the development from the initial design stage to the transition to the mass production model can be easily performed. Become.

  In addition, the internal lottery adds the number of judgment values of each role referred from the role-specific table to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and depending on whether or not the result of the addition overflows, Judgment is made on whether or not there is a win. For this reason, an internal lottery can be performed using the number of determination values of each combination as it is. It should be noted that when the winning determination table is generated before the actual winning determination is made, the loop processing is required twice, but according to this embodiment, the loop processing in the lottery processing can be performed only once. Thus, the processing efficiency in the entire lottery process is high.

  In the present embodiment, the random numbers for internal lottery acquired by the random number acquisition process are not used as they are extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 by the sampling circuit 43 but are used after being processed by software. It is said. The random number generation circuit 42 generates a random number by updating at a high speed at the frequency of the pulse signal of the pulse generation circuit 42a. However, in the random number for internal lottery after processing by software, the periodicity of the update is increased by the processing. It will be lost.

  On the other hand, in the internal lottery, since the number of determination values corresponding to each combination is sequentially added to the random value for the internal lottery, each combination is determined as winning as shown in FIGS. The random number value for the internal lottery to be set will be hardened. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming as much as possible by losing the periodicity of the random numbers for internal lottery by processing by software and varying the values.

  Moreover, the frequency of the pulse signal generated by the pulse generation circuit 42a for updating the values of the counters 42b and 42c of the random number generation circuit 42 is higher than the frequency of the operation clock of the CPU 41a, and is not an integral multiple. For this reason, the update of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is difficult to synchronize with the processing performed by the CPU 41a. In addition, by increasing the frequency of the pulse signal of the pulse generation circuit 42a, the update speed of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 can be made extremely fast.

  On the other hand, the processing of the random number by software only needs to replace the upper byte and the lower byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 by the sampling circuit 43. Therefore, even a relatively large random number of 16 bits does not increase the load required for processing necessary to lose periodicity and can be easily acquired. Since a large random number can be acquired in this way, the probability setting in the internal lottery can be finely performed.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled at the time when it is determined that the game is finished, and after the game is finished, the waiting time for the BB winning effect is set. Even during a period in which setting of the bet number is prohibited until the lapse, it is possible to return medals stored as credits (including medals used for setting the bet number). As long as the player's will is reflected, the medal for the credit stored as owned by the player can be returned. Thus, for example, in a game in which a big bonus prize is generated, before starting the big bonus game accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize, a part of the medal memorized as the credit is given as a prize (for example, a soft drink or a cigarette). Etc.), but it is possible to receive a medal return reflecting such a player's will.

  In addition, when a big bonus prize is generated, an effect at the time of BB winning indicating that the big bonus prize has occurred is executed, so that the player's interest in shifting to the big bonus accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize is effective. Can be enhanced.

  Also, in the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and setting of the bet number is prohibited until the ending effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. Can be returned as a credit (including medals used to set the number of bets), so as much as possible to reflect the player's will, It is possible to receive a medal for the credit stored as owned by the player. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus.

  Further, since the ending effect indicating that the big bonus has ended is executed at the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the end of the big bonus can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, even in a game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, even if the game is controlled to be stopped, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, the game ends, and the store clerk performs a reset operation. Medals stored as credits (including medals used to set bets) are returned even during the period when setting of bets is forbidden until the stoppage state is released Therefore, it is possible to receive medals for credits stored as owned by the player, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus.

  In addition, after a determination is made that the game in which the big bonus prize has occurred is terminated, a power interruption occurs in the period until the BB prize presentation effect waiting time elapses. When the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time, the prohibition on the setting of the bet number is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas the BB prize is won. When power interruption occurs in the stage before the time effect reaches the final stage, and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the start of the BB winning effect, the power is cut off before the end of the BB winning effect, and after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received during execution of the time effect, the current BB winning effect is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so the BB winning effect is troublesome for the player. The control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant in spite of the fact that the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, and there is a discrepancy between both control states. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and backs up that the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage at the next activation. If so, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the fact that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is backed up, the BB winning effect is returned to the final stage state. Yes. For this reason, when power interruption occurs in a state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed is not executed from the beginning after the return, so the BB winning effect is performed. Can be more effectively prevented from becoming annoying for the player.

  In addition, for example, during the period from the determination of the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred until the BB winning effect production waiting time elapses, credit settlement is performed and medals are being paid out along with this settlement. When a payout error occurs and the payout error is canceled, the bet amount is set when the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error has elapsed from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect. When the prohibition is canceled and the setting of the number of bets is permitted, a payout error occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled. The BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the BB winning effect is started, the error state is controlled before the BB winning effect is finished, and when the error state is canceled after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. If a new command is received during the execution of the BB winning effect, the effect based on the newly received command is executed after the BB winning effect being executed is cancelled, and the BB winning effect is displayed by the player. Can be prevented, and the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant despite the progress of the control state on the main control unit 41 side, and there is a discrepancy between the two control states. It can be prevented from occurring.

  In the sub control unit 91, the sub control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of the error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning is performed. If the data indicating that the time effect is in the elapsed stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, BB The production at the time of winning is to return in the final stage. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is not set, a power interruption occurs after the end of the game for which the end condition of the big bonus has been established, and until the ending effect production waiting time elapses. In the case of returning, when the time excluding the time already passed before power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time of the ending effect, the prohibition on setting of the bet amount is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted On the other hand, if a power interruption occurs at a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, when the ending effect is started and then interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then returned from the power interruption, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When the command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player, and the main Although the control state on the control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and if the fact that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage at the next start-up is backed up, If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, the ending effect is returned to the final stage. For this reason, if a power interruption occurs when the ending effect has reached the final stage, the ending effect that was being executed will not be executed from the beginning after the return, so the ending effect is troublesome for the player. Can be effectively prevented.

  Further, when the stop function is not set, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined and the ending effect production wait time elapses, for example, the credit settlement is performed. If a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with this settlement, and the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error occurs from the waiting time of the ending production At that point, the prohibition on setting of the number of bets is lifted and the setting of the number of bets is permitted, whereas a payout error occurs at the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage. When the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, it is controlled to an error state before the ending effect ends, and when the error state is canceled after that, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In the sub control unit 91, the sub control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of the error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning is performed. If the data indicating that the time effect is in the elapsed stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, BB The production at the time of winning is to return in the final stage. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is set, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, it is determined that the power interruption occurs in the period until the waiting time for the ending effect is over. When returning, after the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and the stop state is released. The prohibition on the setting of the bet number is also released at that time, and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas a power outage occurs before the ending effect reaches the final stage, and then returns The ending effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, the power is interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then the ending effect is executed from the beginning when the power is restored from the power interruption. When the command indicating the start of the state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the in-stop notification is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming troublesome for the player, Although the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, when the stop function is set, after the end of the game in which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied is determined and the ending effect production waiting time elapses, for example, credit settlement is performed. If a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with this settlement, and the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error occurs from the waiting time of the ending production After the elapse of time, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and when the batting state is released, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is also released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted. If a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending performance reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending performance It is executed from the beginning of the course stage. For this reason, after an ending effect is started, if an error occurs before the ending effect ends, and then the error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a command indicating the start of the stop state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the stop notification is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the ending effect from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, the time required to execute the progress stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the time until the transition to the final stage is determined as the waiting time for the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the end of the game. Since the set time is shorter than the time when the setting of the bet number is prohibited, the BB winning that was executed after returning to the final stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect was cut off. Even when the time effect and the ending effect are executed from the beginning, the overlapping period between the period when the BB winning effect and the ending effect are executed and the period until the prohibition of the setting of the bet number is canceled, It is possible to prevent the discrepancy between the control states of both the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 as much as possible.

  In this embodiment, an BB winning effect and an ending effect are produced while an error occurs and the error state is controlled before the BB winning effect and the ending effect waiting time elapses. The timing of the waiting time for the BB prize and the ending effect is resumed from the time when the waiting time is interrupted and the error state is canceled. The waiting time may be counted without interruption while being controlled to the error state. By doing so, the prohibition of setting the bet amount is released when the error state is canceled. In addition, it is possible to set the bet number at the earliest possible stage, and the bet number is set in this state, so that the resumption of the BB winning effect and the ending effect can be performed. Since the cancellation is not bothered by the player, the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced. It is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the control state.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting for determining whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is in the proper range. If the value determination process 1 is executed for each game and the value read from the set value work 1 is not a value in the range of 1 to 6, it is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. . In the present embodiment, the value stored in the set value work 1, that is, the range of the set value that can be selected by the setting change process is 1 to 6 values. If the value is not in the range of 6, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Then, once controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. Is not released. In other words, if the setting value is not appropriate due to data corruption, the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (in general, the setting change operation) Since the game is performed by a game store employee, it is ensured that the game is played based on the setting value selected by the game store), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 match, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery and the setting change A set value determination process 2 for determining whether or not the set value set at the time coincides with each game, a value read from the set value work 1, a value read from the set value work 2, Even if they do not match, the error state due to the RAM abnormal error is controlled and the progress of the game is disabled. In the present embodiment, the setting value after the change is stored in each of the setting value work 1 and the setting value work 2 when the setting is changed. Normally, the value stored in the setting value 1 and the setting value are set. The value stored in 2 should match, and if these values do not match, the setting value may have been rewritten illegally, and in this case, the progress of the game is disabled. It becomes.

  In addition, whether the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the internal lottery of the previous game. The set value determination process 3 for determining whether or not the set value matches is executed for each game, and the value read from the set value work 1 does not match the value read from the set value work 3 Even in this case, the game is controlled in an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In the present embodiment, the set value used for the internal lottery is stored in the set value work 3, and normally the value stored in the set value 1 (the set value used in the internal lottery of this game). And the value stored in setting value 3 (the setting value used in the previous internal lottery of the game) should match, and if these values do not match, the setting value may have been illegally rewritten In this case, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Then, once controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. Is not released. In other words, in order to restart the game when there is a possibility that the setting value has been illegally rewritten, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation that is more time-consuming than a reset operation for canceling the normal error state. Cheating can be effectively prevented.

  If there is a possibility that the setting value has been rewritten illegally, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, Since the setting change operation is performed by a game store employee, it is ensured that the game is played based on the setting value selected by the game store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, six values in the range of 1 to 6 are applied as setting values used for internal lottery, that is, setting values that determine the winning probability of internal lottery. However, the setting values are limited to this. It is only necessary to be able to select and set at least a plurality of stages of setting values. For example, a setting value capable of selecting two stages of high / low and a setting value of three stages in the range of 1 to 3 A setting value that can be selected may be applied. Further, the setting values work 1 to 3 of the RAM 41c store the values 1 to 6 themselves as values indicating these setting values, but any value that can specify the setting value may be stored. For example, 0 to 5 (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the actual set value) corresponding to the set values 1 to 6 may be stored in the set value works 1 to 3.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting value determination process 1 for determining whether or not the value read from the setting value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, the value read from the setting value work 1, and the reading from the setting value work 2 Set value determination process 2 for determining whether or not the set value matches, the set value for determining whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match All of the determination process 3 is executed to determine whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is appropriate. By performing any one of these set value determination processes 1 to 3, It may be determined whether the set value used for the lottery is appropriate. For example, only the set value determination process 1, only the set value determination process 2, or only the set value determination process 3 is performed. Of set value determination processing 1 to 3 It performs Chiizure or two processes, or the like may be used.

  Further, any one of the set value determination processes 1 to 3 is performed every game, and the remaining one process or all the remaining processes are performed at a predetermined opportunity (for example, at the end of the bonus every predetermined number of games). Or two of the set value determination processes may be performed for each game, and the remaining one process may be performed at a predetermined opportunity.

  In the present embodiment, the set value determination processes 1 to 3 are executed for each game. However, the set value determination processes 1 to 3 are not performed for each game, but the set value determination processes 1 to 3 are performed for the predetermined game. It may be performed every number or in a game of a specific period (such as a period excluding bonus).

  In the present embodiment, in the internal lottery process, the set value determination processes 1 to 3 for determining whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is appropriate are executed. For example, it may be performed at the start of the game or at the end of the game.

  In the present embodiment, in the internal lottery process, the value of the set value work 3 is updated to the value read from the set value work 1 (the set value read for use in the internal lottery of the current game). The timing at which the value of the set value work 3 is updated to the value read from the set value work 1 is any timing until the game ends (for example, when all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, medals At the end of payout).

  In the present embodiment, when the setting is changed, the set value is stored in two areas, that is, the set value work 1 and the set value work 2. In the set value determination process 2, the value stored in the set value work 1 It is determined whether or not the value stored in the set value work 2 matches, and if it does not match, it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate set value. In the setting value determination process 2, it is determined whether or not all the values stored in these three or more storage areas match. If they do not match, it is determined that the setting value is not an appropriate setting value. May be.

  Further, when the setting is changed, the set value is stored in three or more storage areas, and in the set value determination process 2, whether or not the values stored in these three or more areas match a predetermined number or more (for example, 5 Setting values are stored in one storage area, and it is determined whether or not three or more of the values match, and if a predetermined number or more does not match, it may be determined that the setting values are not appropriate. In this way, even if a part of the data indicating the setting value stored at the time of changing the setting is lost due to noise or the like, it is erroneously determined that the setting value is not appropriate and the progress of the game is disabled. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, only the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game is stored in the set value work 3, and the value stored in the set value work 1 and the set value work in the set value determination process 3. 3, whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game match, If they do not match, it is determined that the set value is not appropriate, but the set value used for the internal lottery of each game is stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the set value determination process 3 When the setting value used for the internal lottery and the setting value used for the internal lottery of the game before the previous game (for example, a game before a predetermined number of games) match, it is determined. Proper It may be determined not to be a constant value.

  In addition, the setting values used for the internal lottery of each game are stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the setting values used for the internal lottery of the current game in the setting value determination process 3 and a plurality of values before the previous game It may be determined whether or not all the set values used in the internal lottery of the game match, and if they do not match, it may be determined that the set values are not appropriate.

  Further, the setting values used for the internal lottery of each game are stored over a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the setting values used for the internal lottery of the current game in the setting value determination process 3 and a plurality of values before the previous game are stored. Whether or not each set value used for the internal lottery of the game matches a predetermined number or more (for example, each set value used for the internal lottery of the past 5 games is stored in five storage areas, of which 3 If two or more values match, it may be determined that the setting value is not an appropriate setting value. In this case, the setting is changed due to noise or the like. Even when a part of the data indicating the set value stored at the time is lost, it is possible to prevent the game from being disabled due to an erroneous determination that the set value is not appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, when determining the winning of the winning in the internal lottery process, if it is determined that the set value determining process is not an appropriate set value, the RAM is controlled to be in an abnormal error state. However, when the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is not an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6), the probability based on the initial value of the set value (for example, the set value 1) You may make it determine winning of a prize.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the unused area in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is initialized for each game. It is possible to prevent the unauthorized program from being resident.

  In the present embodiment, since the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized for each game in addition to the unused area in the RAM 41c, all the unused areas in the RAM 41c at that time are stored for each game. Even if an attempt is made to store an illegal program using an unused stack area without using an unused area of the RAM 41c, there is no room for the illegal program to reside. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent unauthorized programs from being resident, and for example, by adding unauthorized data (such as addresses specified by unauthorized programs) to unused stack areas, the microcomputer malfunctions when data is restored. By rewriting the register to an illegal one by Program and can also be prevented illegal that would to perform the different operations. Further, by storing illegal data in the unused stack area, an area where the saved data should be stored can be compressed, the stack area overflows, and the micro that configures the main control unit 41 is stored. Problems such as the computer running away can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized for each game. However, at least one of the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized for each game. Anything can be used as long as it initializes.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the initialization 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the end of the game, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are changed for each game. If the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized at least once per game, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized. The timing for initialization may be any timing during one game. For example, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the time of starting a game or executing a process that is always executed for each game. Initialization may be performed.

  Also, before the start of setting (before transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of activation, when the four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, Four types of initializations 1 to 4 having different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition, and any of these four types of initialization conditions is satisfied, and an unused region in the RAM 41c is always Since the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized, it is possible to more reliably prevent the illegal program from being resident.

  In particular, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup, the unused area in the RAM 41c and the unused stack area in the stack area are always initialized. Therefore, the unused area and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are used. Even when an unauthorized program or unauthorized data is stored, the control state of the main control unit 41 can be prevented from returning based on the data in the RAM 41c while the unauthorized program or the unauthorized data is stored.

  In addition, in the power interruption interrupt processing, after destructive diagnosis data with any bit set to 1 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c, the RAM parity based on all data including the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c. RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that becomes 0, and RAM parity calculated based on data stored in all areas including the unused area and unused stack area in the RAM 41c at the time of restoration Whether or not destructive diagnosis data is stored, and if the RAM parity is not 0, or even if the RAM parity is 0, the destructive diagnosis data is stored normally. If not, an error occurs due to a RAM error, and the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on. Since the game cannot proceed until initialization 1 is performed to initialize all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is activated. Even if a malicious program is stored in the computer, the malicious program can be found and initialized.

  Further, when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal and a RAM abnormal error state occurs, initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed. Even when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, and when the setting key switch 37 is turned on after that, all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c Since the initialization 1 is performed, the malicious program that may be stored in the RAM 41c can be surely removed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the progress of the game is disabled, and the error due to the RAM abnormality error once. When the state is controlled, the state is changed to the setting change mode, and the state in which the progress of the game is disabled is not released unless a set value is newly selected and set based on the setting change operation. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change Since the operation is performed by a game shop employee, it is ensured that the game is played based on the setting value selected by the game shop), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal in most cases when the control cannot be continued due to a malfunction such as a power failure or the CPU 41a running out of control. For this reason, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the data is normal only when the CPU 41a is activated after recovering from these states. Therefore, whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal. This determination can be made only in a situation where there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data. That is, in a situation where there is a low possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data, it is not necessary to perform the determination, and the load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that the RAM parity based on all the data in the RAM 41c in the power interruption processing, that is, the result of the exclusive OR operation becomes 0, and is stored. Since it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas in the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is 0, the determination Can be performed accurately and conveniently.

  In the present embodiment, in the power interruption interrupt processing, destruction diagnosis data (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c. Is stored in the RAM 41c, the adjustment data for which the RAM parity is 0 based on all the data of the RAM 41c including the destruction diagnosis data is stored. Whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normally stored on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the destruction diagnosis data is also stored normally. The control state is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 41c. As a result, when 00H is stored in all areas, that is, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0 even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is normal by the determination of the RAM parity at startup. If the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0, the area in which the destructive diagnosis data is to be stored is also 0, and it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c has the correct contents at the time of activation.

  Further, when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM parity is 0 at startup and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normally stored, and determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the destructive diagnosis stored in the RAM 41c. Since the data for destruction diagnosis is still stored in the RAM 41c even after the activation, the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at the next activation, but the data is destroyed. Since diagnostic data is stored, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination as normal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data in the RAM 41c and the progress of the game is disabled, a setting value changing operation as a condition for releasing the disabled progress of the game is performed. As all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized in accordance with the transition to the valid setting change mode (setting change process), the data in the RAM 41c due to the occurrence of an abnormality Initialization and data initialization associated with selection / setting of set values can be performed at a time, and unnecessary processing can be omitted. Further, when the CPU 41a is activated, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state before determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal. At that time, the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state. If it is determined that there is, the determination as to whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal is not performed, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and a new setting value is selected and set. It can be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, initialization 1 is performed to initialize all areas except the in-use stack area of the RAM 41c before shifting to the setting change process. For example, the initialization 1 may be performed after the end of the setting change process, or may be performed when the set value is determined in the setting change process. In this case, since the inconvenience arises when the determined set value is changed, in initialization 1, all areas except the used stack area and the set value work of the RAM 41c are initialized. Become.

  Further, in this embodiment, once the control is performed in the error state due to the RAM abnormality error, the game is disabled until the setting change process is performed. Then, initialization 1 is performed to initialize all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c, and the set value is set to an initial value (for example, set value 1). In this state, a reset operation is performed. By doing so, the game may be resumed.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a transmits a command according to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the sub control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 is transmitted from the game control board 40. The production control is performed based on the command, and the CPU 41a does not need to control the production only by transmitting the command. Therefore, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced, and the production can be varied. it can.

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a interrupts the process being executed by the voltage drop signal being input to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG and executes the power interruption process. In the interrupt process, a process for enabling determination of whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of restoration, such as a process for setting destruction diagnosis data or a process for calculating and setting RAM parity adjustment data, or an output port Before performing initialization or the like, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA. If a voltage drop signal is also input to the signal input terminal DATA, the data in the RAM 41c is restored at the time of restoration. In contrast to performing processing for enabling determination as to whether it is normal, initialization of the output port, etc., if no voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA, It is adapted to return to the processing of the.

  That is, the voltage drop signal is input to the two systems of the input unit to the main control unit 41, and the CPU 41a does not perform the power interruption interrupt process when the voltage drop signal is input to one of the input units. Before the process for enabling determination of whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the initialization of the output port, or the like is performed, it is determined again whether or not the voltage drop signal is input to the other input unit. These processes are executed only when a voltage drop signal is also input to the input section of this, and when power failure is detected by mistake, whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery is detected. Since it is possible to prevent the process for enabling the determination and the process such as the initialization of the output port from being performed, the control of the CPU 41a is interrupted for an unnecessarily long time due to erroneous detection of power interruption. ,necessary Possible to prevent the load is applied to the top.

  In addition, other interrupts are prohibited during the execution of the power interruption interrupt process and the timer interrupt process (main). For example, the voltage drops during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main). Even when a signal is input, double interruptions do not occur, and it is possible to prevent the processing load on the CPU 41a from increasing and data consistency from being lost. In particular, even if a voltage drop signal is input during the transmission of a command, no interruption occurs and the transmission of the command is not hindered, and the transmission can be completed normally before the CPU 41a stops driving. .

  If the interrupt timing of the power interruption interrupt processing and the interrupt timing of the timer interrupt processing (main) are simultaneous, that is, if interrupt 2 and interrupt 3 occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 Priority is given to the power interruption interrupt process, and if interrupt 2 occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main), the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt process (main) ends. Since interrupt processing is executed and power interruption interrupt processing is performed at the earliest possible stage while preventing multiple interrupts, it is ensured that power interruption interrupt processing is performed before the CPU 41a stops driving. Can be done.

  Further, the CPU 41a can execute four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4, and when interrupts 1 and 4 that are set to unused are generated, the CPU 41a immediately returns to the original process. The unused interrupt processing to be executed is executed. For this reason, even if unused interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the process immediately returns to the process before the interrupt. Therefore, even if an unused interrupt occurs due to noise or the like, the CPU 41a runs out of control. It is possible to prevent such troubles.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Needless to say, it is included.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, when the rotation of the reel is started and when the reel is stopped and the reel that is still rotating still remains, the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b are referred to. Then, a stop control table is created for each rotating reel, but the ROM 41b stores a stop control table for each gaming state according to the internal winning state and the reel stop status (and stopped stop position) in advance. In accordance with the table index, it is possible to specify the necessary stop control table according to the internal winning state for each of the gaming states and the stop state of the reel, and when the reel starts rotating and the reel Rotate by referring to the table index when the reel stops and there are still spinning reels. To another reel may set a stop control table.

  In the above embodiment, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (for each symbol) are defined for one reel, and each area (area number) is defined as a stop control table. Correspondingly, by using a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined, that is, a stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely determined corresponding to an area in which one symbol varies. Although the reel stop control is performed, for example, the number of drawing steps and the number of drawing frames (stop position) are uniquely set for each area less than one symbol, for example, one step, that is, every minimum unit when driving the reel motor. The stop control of the reel may be performed using the stop control table defined in the above. By doing so, the stop position can be changed in units of the number of steps of the reel motor, and the stop is stopped. It can be further diversify stop position relative work position.

  Further, in the above embodiment, among the plurality of stop control tables that uniquely determine the number of frames to be drawn with respect to the stop operation position, the internal winning state of each game state, the reel stop state (and the stop position that has been stopped) ) Is selected and a stop control of the reel is performed in accordance with the selected stop control table, but a plurality of stop positions that uniquely determine the stop position relative to the stop operation position are specified. The table is used instead of the stop control table, and when the stop operation is detected, the stop position specifying table is referred to and the reel is stopped at the stop position uniquely specified corresponding to the stop operation position. You may make it perform.

  Further, by defining a stop priority for the stop position, a plurality of stop priority tables that uniquely determine the stop position with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position) are used instead of the stop control table. When a stop operation is detected, the stop priority table is referenced, and the stop priorities of all stop positions within the retractable range (up to 5 frames) from the stop operation position are compared, and the highest stop priority is obtained. You may make it perform the control which stops a reel in a stop position.

  Also, select the number of draws that is uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel). When a stop operation is performed, if the target stop position is within the range of the number of frames to be pulled in, pull-in control is performed to pull the stop position and stop, and the stop is prohibited. Kicking control (so-called control method control) may be performed in which other stop positions are pulled in and stopped so as not to stop the stop position. By performing the pull-in control and kick-off control in this way, the stop position is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (number of steps from the reel reference position). Therefore, the control for deriving the display result by the pull-in control and kick-off control is It can be said that this is a control pattern for uniquely specifying the stop position with respect to the stop operation position.

  In addition, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state, the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel), If the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, the reel stop control by the stop control table, the reel stop control by the stop priority table, the reel stop control by the pull-in control and the kicking control are performed in combination. For example, only the reels that have stopped first may be controlled to stop the reels using the stop control table, and the other reels may be controlled to be stopped by pull-in control and kicking control.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a control pattern uniquely determined with respect to each internal winning state of each gaming state and the stop state of the reel (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel) is selected, Although the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, at least a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected control pattern. Anything is acceptable.

  In the above embodiment, the determination value number storage area of the RAM 41c in which the determination value number used for the internal lottery is stored uses a 2-byte area to store the determination value number in each case. However, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for special roles is not often set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. Thus, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the number of judgment values is common regardless of a setting value, a part is memorize | stored in common with the whole setting values 1-6, but the number of judgment values becomes a setting value. Regardless, the common items can also be stored individually for each of the setting values 1 to 6. Further, if the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, all of them can be stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, it was whether it memorize | stored in common with the whole setting value 1-6, or it memorize | stored separately with respect to each of the setting values 1-6 in the said embodiment. However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 6 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 4-6, the number of judgment values can also be made common. The same applies to the number of determination values for the bet number. For example, the bet numbers 1 and 2 may be common and the bet number 3 may be individual.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of determination values referred to according to the number of bets for the same combination at the same setting value is stored at a different address for each of the bets (1 or 3). That is, for the same combination at the same set value, even if the number of judgment values referred to according to the number of bets is the same, it is stored separately, but the combination with the same winning probability regardless of the number of bets For the role that makes the determination value number storage address common, or for the role that makes the winning probability the same regardless of the setting value and the number of bets, the address of the determination value number storage address is made common In this way, by storing the number of determination values in common, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for that purpose.

  In the above embodiment, the number of determination values acquired in accordance with the set value or the like is sequentially added to the random number value for internal lottery. However, the value of random number for internal lottery in which the acquired number of determination values is acquired. The subtraction result may be used as a new random value for internal lottery. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, it can be determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the subtraction result (here, the subtraction result becomes negative).

  In the embodiment, in the internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination according to the game situation is sequentially added to the acquired random value for internal lottery, and when the addition result overflows, It was supposed to be judged as a winner. On the other hand, a winning determination table in which a determination value for determining each combination as winning is determined for each game in accordance with the number of determination values for each combination according to the game situation, and the internal random number for internal lottery acquired It is also possible to perform an internal lottery by comparing the value of each with the determination value of each combination. In addition, a winning determination table in which determination values for determining each winning combination are stored in advance in the ROM 41b, and an internal lottery value is compared by comparing the acquired internal random number value with the determination value for each winning combination. It is good also as what performs.

  In the above embodiment, the game can be started only by setting 3 as the number of bets in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, even in the normal gaming state, the game can be started by setting 1 as the bet number, and further, the game can be started by setting 2 as the bet number. Also good. As a result, when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the small role in the internal lottery is lowered as compared with the case where 3 is set as the bet number, and when winning the small role The number of paid out medals can be increased. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of Bell is 1 / 4.82 and the payout number is 7, but when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number, The winning probability may be lower than 1 / 4.82 and the payout number may be more than seven. Further, the winning probability of the bell and the number of payouts may be changed when 1 is set as the bet number and when 2 is set.

  In the above embodiment, the special combination and the small combination or re-playing combination are not won at the same time in one internal lottery. You may make it win a game player simultaneously.

  For example, a role-specific table for a small role and a re-playing role in which the storage destination addresses for the small role and re-playing role are registered, and a role-specific table for a special role in which the storage destination address for the number of judgment values for special roles is registered In the internal lottery, for the same random number for internal lottery, a lottery for a small role and a replaying role that refers to a role-specific table for a small role and a replaying role, and a role-specific table for special roles The special role lottery to be referred to is separately performed, and the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role are registered in the special-purpose role table. Based on the number of judgment values stored in the address area, the range of judgment values for each small role, replaying role, and special role, and the small role, replaying role, and special role are won in duplicate. The range of judgment values can be specified. Therefore, a configuration may be possible in which a small role or a re-playing role and a special role can be won at the same time.In such a configuration, even if a prize for a small role or a re-playing role occurs as a result of the game, Since it is not denied that the generation of a special combination having a higher degree of advantage than that of a small combination or re-playing combination is allowed, the player's expectation for the generation of the special combination can be maintained even in such a situation.

  Also, in this case, after the special combination is established, that is, in the state where the special combination winning flag is carried over, a plurality of special combinations are duplicated by performing only a small combination and a re-playing combination. I won't win. Furthermore, since the lottery for the small role and the re-playing role can be made common before and after the special role is established, the internal lottery in the normal gaming state can be simplified, and in the state of being carried over after the special role is established Since it is only necessary to perform the lottery of the small combination and the re-playing combination, the processing efficiency of the internal lottery in a state where the winning of the special combination is carried over becomes high. On the other hand, after the special role is established, both the lottery of the small role and the re-playing role and the special role lottery will be performed, and if the special role is won by the special role lottery, the winning will be treated as invalid. Even in this case, multiple special roles will never be won.

  In the above configuration, after the special role is established, that is, in the state where the special role winning flag is carried over, the value of the determination value range in which the special role is won alone is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. If the value of the range of judgment values for winning a combination of small roles and special roles is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, it is determined that only the small role is won, Even if multiple special roles are not won, it will be lost even when the value of the judgment value range in which small and special roles are won in duplicate is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. Even in this case, a plurality of special roles will not be won in duplicate. In addition, after the special role is established, the role-specific table in which data that can specify the range of the judgment value that the special role wins alone and the judgment value range that the small role and the special role wins are not registered, In other words, the internal lottery process may be performed by the role-specific table in which only the data that can specify the range of the judgment value to be won by the re-gamer and the data that can specify the range of the judgment value to be won by the small role are registered. Even in this case, a plurality of special roles will not be won in duplicate.

  In addition, from the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the special role It may be possible to specify only a range of judgment values for winning a small role and a replaying role alone, or a range of judgment values for winning a combination of a small role or a replaying role and a special role. According to the configuration, even if a small role or re-playing role is won as a result of the game, it is not denied that the special role is won, so even in this situation, the player's expectation for winning the special role Can be sustained.

  Also, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding only to the special role, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to both the special role and the small role or the replaying role, Register the storage address of the number of decision values corresponding to only the game combination, and in the internal lottery, add the number of decision values of each combination referenced from the combination table to the internal random number obtained If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the small role or replaying role If the result of the addition is overflowed, the winning combination of both the special role and the small role or the replaying role is judged, and the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the small role or the replaying role is overflowed Is a small role or replaying role It is possible to have a configuration in which a special role and a small role or replaying role can be won at the same time, and even if such a configuration is made, a general role will be won as a result of the game. Even in such a situation, it is not denied that the occurrence of a special role with a higher degree of advantage than the small role or the re-game player is allowed, so even in such a situation, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special role is maintained. be able to.

  In this case, since it is possible to determine whether or not the winning combination is made using the same loop process regardless of the type of combination or combination of combinations, individual determination is made according to the type of combination as described above. The capacity of the processing program for executing the lottery process can be further reduced as compared with the case where it is performed.

  In the above configuration, after the special role is established, that is, in the state where the special role winning flag is carried over, the value of the determination value range in which the special role is won alone is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. If the value of the judgment value range in which a small role or re-playing role and a special role are won in duplicate is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, only the small role or re-playing role is determined. As a result of the determination of winning, a plurality of special roles will not be won. In addition, after a special combination is established, it is determined that the game is lost even if the value of the judgment value range in which the small combination or replay combination and the special combination are won is obtained as a random number for internal lottery. Even in this case, a plurality of special roles will not be won. In addition, after the special role is established, data is registered that can specify the range of judgment values that the special role will win independently and the range of judgment values that the small role or re-playing role and special role will win. The internal lottery process is performed by the role-specific table in which only the data that can specify the range of the judgment value won by the re-playing role and the data that can specify the range of the judgment value that the small role wins are registered. Even in this case, a plurality of special roles will not be won in duplicate.

  Also, from the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table, the range of judgment values that the re-playing role or small role wins alone, the small role or re-playing role and the special role overlap. It may be possible to specify only the range of determination values to be won, and according to such a configuration, even if a small role wins as a result of the game, it is not denied that a special role is won. Even in such a situation, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for winning the special role.

  In the case where a small combination or replay combination and a special combination can be won at the same time, for example, a big bonus and one (1), a big bonus and one (2), a big bonus and cherry, a big bonus and bell For example, a bonus and a plurality of types of small roles or re-game players may be duplicated to be won. In this way, when, for example, a big bonus and one (1) or a big bonus and one (2) are won at the same time by internal lottery, one (1), one (2) and a big bonus are awarded. When missed, chances are derived as described above, so the expectation for the big bonus increases, and when 1 (1) or 1 (2) wins, the chance is not derived, but the big bonus Therefore, even if one (1) or one (2) is won, the expectation for the big bonus can be maintained.

  Furthermore, in this case, the big bonus and the bell are set to be larger than the judgment value range in which the big bonus and the bell are won, and the big bonus is set to be larger. The probability of winning the big bonus and cherry at the same time may be higher than the probability of winning the bell at the same time, and this way, when the cherry wins than when the bell wins However, since the possibility of winning at the same time as the big bonus increases, the expectation for winning the special role can be changed depending on the type when the small role or replaying role is won. Can be increased. Also, the judgment value range in which the big bonus and one (1) or one (2) are won more than the judgment value range in which the big bonus and cherry and the big bonus and bell are won. Is set so that the probability of winning the big bonus and one (1) or one (2) at the same time is higher than the probability of winning the big bonus and cherry or bell at the same time. Well, if you do this, it's more likely that you won at the same time as the big bonus when 1 (1) or 1 (2) is won than when Cherry or Bell won. When one (1) or one (2) wins, it is possible to change the expectation for winning the special role, so that interest can be enhanced.

  In the above embodiment, the entire high-order byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is replaced with the low-order byte, and the entire low-order byte is replaced with the high-order byte. On the other hand, the data of a specific bit among the random number bits extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is simply replaced with data of other bits (however, other than the masked seventh and fifteenth bits). Also good. Alternatively, the random number value extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be acquired as it is as a random number for internal lottery. Furthermore, it may be processed into a random number for internal lottery by a method different from the above embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to the case where the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42, that is, the random number extracted by the hardware random number function is processed by software has been described. However, the random number processing by the software described above may be applied to a random number that is periodically updated by software. For example, the CPU 41a sends an instruction to the second microcomputer to extract a random number periodically updated by a timer interrupt or the like in a second microcomputer different from the microcomputer constituting the main control unit 41, and I The data can be input to the CPU 41a via the / O port 41d and stored in the general-purpose register 41GR. The function of the second microcomputer may be included in the microcomputer constituting the main control unit 41. Also in this case, the random number value obtained after processing can be varied, and the effect of preventing the player from aiming can be achieved.

  In the above, the extracted random number and the processed random number are stored in the general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a. In the internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination is sequentially added to the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR. However, a random number after processing, that is, an acquired random number may be stored in the RAM 41c, and the number of determination values for each combination may be sequentially added to the value stored in the RAM 41c.

  Further, in the above embodiment, after the game ends at the time of the big bonus winning, until the BB winning effect waiting time elapses, after the game ends at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is disabled. Until the ending waiting time elapses, after the ending waiting time elapses at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is enabled, until the stop state is released by the reset operation by the store clerk In this period, setting of the bet number is prohibited, but it is sufficient that setting of the bet number is prohibited at least in any one or more of these periods.

  In addition, the slot machine 1 of the above embodiment has a stop function, but may be applied to a slot machine that does not have a stop function.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the waiting time for producing the BB winning effect and the waiting time for producing the BB end effect may be the same time or different times.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus winning is applied as the transition winning in which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited for a certain period of time (the waiting time for the production of the BB winning effect) at the time of winning. (Regular bonus winning etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of types of special roles. Furthermore, even for the same type of special role, among them, there are more than one type of big bonus prize or regular bonus prize (for example, one of the combinations of symbols constituting the bonus prize, the color of the symbols constituting the bonus prize) Or if the two are different, or if the bonus consists of different bonus controls, such as the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Sometimes the setting of the number of bets may be prohibited for a certain period. Further, the period during which the setting of the bet amount is prohibited at the time of winning may differ depending on the type of special combination (big bonus winning and regular bonus winning) and the type of big bonus winning or regular bonus winning. Then, an effect at the time of bonus winning having a different execution time may be executed according to a period during which setting of the bet number is prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special gaming state in which the setting of the bet amount is prohibited for a certain period (the waiting time for producing the ending effect) at the end, but other special gaming states ( Regular bonus etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. Furthermore, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are even more types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols that constitute bonus winnings that trigger the transition to the bonus, transition timing to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only for a specific bonus, the setting of the bet number may be prohibited for a certain period at the end. Further, the period during which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited at the end may differ depending on the type of special gaming state (big bonus and regular bonus) and the type of big bonus or regular bonus. And you may make it perform the ending effect from which execution time differs according to the period when the setting of the number of bets is prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special game state controlled to the stop state in which the setting of the bet number is prohibited until the reset operation is performed after the end, but other special games A state (such as a regular bonus) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. Furthermore, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are even more types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols that constitute bonus winnings that trigger the transition to the bonus, transition timing to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only a specific bonus may be controlled to be stopped after completion.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even when the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the period during which the credit settlement prohibition is canceled and the setting of the bet number is prohibited when the end of the game is determined. Credit payment can also be made at (Ending effect waiting time). For example, in a game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined waits for the ending effect. When the time is reached, the game is controlled so that it is stopped, and both the setting of bets and the settlement of credits are prohibited until the elapsed time from the end of the game is reached the waiting time for producing the ending effect. When the elapsed time reaches the production waiting time for the ending production, only the prohibition of credit settlement may be canceled. As a result, in the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the credit cannot be settled until the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined reaches the ending effect production waiting time. Since it is possible to settle credits without waiting for the release of the stop state, the medal for the credits stored as owned by the player should be returned, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. Can receive. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed, particularly when the big bonus ends.

  In the embodiment, the end of the game is determined by the end of the game end process. However, since the game is substantially ended by the end of the medal payout, the game is ended by the end of the payout process. May be determined. In other words, the credit can be settled from the end of the payout process.

  In the embodiment, the timer common to the production wait time timer for timing the production waiting time for the BB prize production and the timer count for the production wait time for measuring the production waiting time for the ending effect is used. Although a counter is used, these timer counters may be provided separately.

  In the embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 0 in the power interruption processing, and it is determined whether the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is 0 at the time of restoration. It is determined whether or not the data of the RAM 41c is normal. Of course, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 in the power interruption interrupt process, and the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is restored at the time of restoration. By determining whether the data is 1, it may be determined whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal. Further, the checksum (exclusive OR of data stored in the corresponding area) of all areas of the RAM 41c is calculated and stored in a specific area in the power interruption processing, and the RAM 41c is restored at the time of restoration. The checksum of all the areas including the specific area where the checksum is stored is calculated. If the result is 00 (H), it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, and must be 00 (H). For example, it may be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  If the checksum is stored normally in the power interruption processing, the checksum of the area excluding the specific area and the data stored in the specific area (the checksum calculated at the time of power interruption) ) Should take the same value, and if the checksum of the area excluding the specific area matches the data stored in the specific area, the result of calculating the exclusive OR of both data is Since the result of calculating the checksum of all areas including the specific area where the checksum of the RAM 41c is stored is 00 (H), it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal. This is because it can.

  In this case as well, in the power interruption interrupt processing, before the checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data (for example, 5A (H)) in which any bit becomes 1 is stored at a predetermined address and restored. In addition to determining whether or not the checksum is 00 (H), it is also determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is normally stored. The checksum is 00 (H) and the destructive diagnosis is performed. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal on the condition that the business data is also normal. Even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, if 00 (H) is stored in all areas, it will be determined to be normal by the checksum determination at the time of startup, After storing the destructive diagnostic data with the bit set to 1, calculate the checksum and store it in a specific area, and also check the destructive diagnostic data in addition to checking the checksum at startup, For example, even when all areas are cleared to 0 at startup and the checksum is 00 (H) and determined to be normal, the destruction diagnosis data does not match the value stored at the time of power failure, Since the determination is made, it is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the abnormality of the data stored in the RAM 41c.

  In the above, the RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing and stored in the RAM 41c, and whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of restoration is 0. Or whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal based on whether or not the checksum calculated based on all the areas of the RAM 41c is 00 (H). RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated and stored in a specific area, and the RAM parity or checksum excluding the specific area of the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is calculated, and the RAM parity or checksum stored in the specific area is calculated. The data in the RAM 41c depends on whether the comparison result matches May be determined whether normal or not. In this case as well, as described above, before the RAM parity or checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address. In addition to determining whether or not the sums match, it is determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is stored correctly, the RAM parity and checksum match, and the destructive diagnosis data is also normal. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal under the above conditions.

  In the above-described embodiment, 5A (H) is stored in the RAM 41c as the failure diagnosis data in the power interruption processing. However, any data other than 0 may be stored and confirmed at the time of startup. .

  In the above embodiment, when the CPU 41a is activated, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is calculated, it is determined whether or not the result is 0, and the destructive diagnosis data is stored on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. It is determined whether or not the data is stored normally. First, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, and the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The RAM parity of the RAM 41c may be calculated and it may be determined whether or not the result is 0. In this way, if the destructive diagnosis data is not normally stored, the RAM parity is calculated. Can be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  In the embodiment, the main control unit 41 is activated based on a reset signal from a reset circuit 49 provided separately from the main control unit 41. However, the reset circuit is replaced with the main control unit 41. The microcomputer which comprises may be mounted.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although RAM41c is mounted in the microcomputer which comprises the main control part 41, you may mount RAM used as a work of the said microcomputer outside the microcomputer.

  In the embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the DC voltage used in the slot machine 1 and detects power interruption when the DC voltage becomes a certain voltage or lower. The power interruption may be detected when the period in which the DC voltage is equal to or lower than a certain voltage continues for a certain period. Alternatively, the AC voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 may be monitored to detect a power interruption when a disturbance in the waveform of the AC voltage is detected, or when the period continues for a certain period.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 is mounted on the game control board 40, but it may be mounted in other places, for example, from the power supply board 100 or the power supply board 100 to the game control board. It may be mounted on a relay board or the like through which a power supply line to 40 passes.

  In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and slots for setting bets using game balls. It may be a machine or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the bet amount.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the embodiment to which the present invention is applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the supply line of the backup power supply with respect to a main control part. (A) is a figure which shows the combination table according to gaming state. (B) is a figure which shows the classification table. It is a figure which shows the memory area of the number of judgment values acquired based on the address registered into the table according to role. It is a figure which respectively shows the example of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery in the normal gaming state, the number of determination values of each combination, and the winning combination. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery of the regular bonus, the number of judgment values of each combination, and the winning combination, respectively. (A) is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of a random number generation circuit. (B) is an explanatory diagram until the CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into a random number for internal lottery by software. It is a figure which shows the structure of the table index stored in ROM41b. It is a figure which shows an example of a stop control table. It is a figure which shows an example of the external output signal output from a slot machine. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of BB signal and RB signal among external output signals. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a continuous production. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process performed when CPU of a main control part generate | occur | produces an error. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a main control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the adjustment process which CPU of a main control part performs in BET processing etc. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random number acquisition process which CPU of a main control part performs in an internal lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in an internal lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process / E which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the production waiting process which CPU of the main control part performs in the process at the time of a game end. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop switch process which CPU of a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process (main) performed when CPU of a main control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is explanatory drawing of the 1st modification of a process until CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. It is explanatory drawing of the 2nd modification of the process until CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment base for attaching a board | substrate case and a board | substrate case to the housing | casing which makes the main body of a slot machine, and a connector control member. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment base for attaching a board | substrate case and a board | substrate case to the housing | casing which makes the main body of a slot machine, and a connector control member. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the substrate case to the attachment base. It is a principal part expansion perspective view of the attachment side member and connector cap which comprise a connector control member. (A) is AA sectional drawing of FIG. 55, (b) (c) is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the board | substrate case to the attachment base, and also attached the connector cap with respect to the attachment side member. (A) is CC sectional drawing of FIG. 57, (b) is DD sectional drawing of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the mounting base and cover member which comprise a connector control member. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the cover member with respect to the mounting base. (A) is EE sectional drawing of FIG. 60, (b) is FF sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 1, and a connector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the cancellation | release condition of the connector cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the cancellation | release condition of the connector cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 2, and a connector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 2. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 2. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 2. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 3, and a connector cover. (A) (b) is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 3. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 4, and a connector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 4. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 4. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 4. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 5, and a connector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 5. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 5. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 5. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 6, and a connector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 6. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the cancellation | release condition of the connector cover in the modification 6. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the cancellation | release condition of the connector cover in the modification 6. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 7, and a connector cover. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing an attachment state of a connector cover in Modification 7. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 7. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 7. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 8, and a connector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 8. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 8. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 8. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the start lever in Example 1, and a cover. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the start lever in Example 1, and a cover. It is a perspective view which shows the release condition of the start lever and the cover in the specific example 1. It is a perspective view which shows the release condition of the start lever and the cover in the specific example 1. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the start lever in Example 2, and a cover. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the start lever in Example 2, and a cover. It is a perspective view which shows the release condition of the start lever and cover in the specific example 2. It is a perspective view which shows the release condition of the start lever and cover in the specific example 2. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the start lever in Example 3, and a cover. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the start lever in Example 3, and a cover. It is a perspective view which shows the release condition of the start lever and cover in the specific example 3. It is a perspective view which shows the release condition of the start lever and cover in the specific example 3.

Explanation of symbols

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 40 game control board, 200 board case, 250 mounting base, 500 connector restricting member, 510 mounting side member, 520 connector cover.

Claims (8)

Variable display capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Equipped with equipment,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game is obtained by displaying the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine that can be awarded according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
A plurality of types of gaming electronic parts including the derivation operation means for inputting or outputting signals relating to the progress of the game;
A game control board mounted with a game control means that is electrically connected to the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and performs control to advance the game;
It is provided between the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and the game control board so as to be detachable by connection with a connector, and for electrically connecting the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and the game control board. Wiring and
A relay board that relays signal communication between the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and the gaming control board connected by the wiring and the connector ;
In the connection portion of the wiring connector between the game control board and the relay board, and in the connection portion of the wiring connector between the relay board and the plurality of types of gaming electronic components, each connector and disconnect regulating means for forming a connection release restricted state to limit understand dividing impossible without destroying the release restriction sites are involved in the connection, the
With
The game control means includes
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, the generation of a prize including the prize winning accompanied by the addition of the gaming value and the special prize accompanying the transition to the special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. A pre-determining means for deciding whether to allow,
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated ;
Including
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has not yet been derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas, a derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is provided for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. From a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify one display result among a plurality of display results located within a predetermined range from the step number with respect to the step number of the stepping motor when operated. Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the determination means,
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control for deriving the display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection means includes
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed, at least one step number of the step numbers for a specific variable display region among the plurality of variable display regions and special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a special pay control pattern that identifies the particular display results for,
The specific variable display when the pre-determining means determines that the generation of the first specific awarded prize accompanying the awarding of the game value of a predetermined size is permitted among the awarded prizes. A display result constituting the first specific prize winning is specified for the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range for the region, and the first specific prize winning is determined . The first specific grant that selects the first specific grant / control pattern that identifies the specific display result with respect to at least one of the number of steps different from the number of steps that identifies the display result that constitutes the display result Winning control pattern selection means,
The pre-determining means determines that the generation of the second specific award with the game value having the same size as the first specific award is permitted among the award winnings. Sometimes, the display result constituting the second specific prize winning is specified for the number of steps where the display result constituting the second specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range for the specific variable display area. , second specific grant winning control pattern for identifying the particular display results for at least one step number of the number of different steps of the step number for identifying a display result that make up a particular grant winning the second Second specific prize winning control pattern selection means for selecting
When it is determined by the pre-decision means that no winning is allowed, the display of the specific variable display area other than the specific display result from any of the number of steps. A non-winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a non-winning control pattern for specifying a result ;
Including
In the display band constituting the specific variable display area, the display result constituting the first specific prize winning and the display result constituting the second specific prize winning are at intervals exceeding the predetermined range. Has been placed,
The first specific prize-winning control pattern includes the first specific prize-winning only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the second specific prize-winning is located within the predetermined range. The display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified for at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the second specific prize is located within the predetermined range. ,
In the second specific prize winning control pattern, the second specific prize winning control is performed only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. A display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified with respect to at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. ,
The special winning control pattern is the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific winning prize is positioned within the predetermined range, and the second specific winning prize control pattern specifies the specific display result The specific display result is specified for at least one of the number of steps to be performed, and the display result constituting the second specific award winning is the number of steps positioned within the predetermined range, and The slot machine characterized in that the first specific award winning control pattern specifies the specific display result with respect to at least one of the number of steps specifying the specific display result . Variable display capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Equipped with equipment,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game is obtained by displaying the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine that can be awarded according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
A plurality of types of gaming electronic parts including the derivation operation means for inputting or outputting signals relating to the progress of the game;
A game control board mounted with a game control means that is electrically connected to the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and performs control to advance the game;
It is provided between the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and the game control board so as to be detachable by connection with a connector, and for electrically connecting the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and the game control board. Wiring and
A relay board that relays signal input and output between the plurality of types of gaming electronic components and the gaming control board connected by the wiring and the connector;
In the connection portion of the wiring connector between the game control board and the relay board, and in the connection portion of the wiring connector between the relay board and the plurality of types of gaming electronic components, each connector Connection release restriction means for forming a connection release restriction state that makes the release impossible unless the destruction restriction part related to the connection is destroyed,
With
The game control means includes
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, the generation of a prize including the prize winning accompanied by the addition of the gaming value and the special prize accompanying the transition to the special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. A pre-determining means for deciding whether to allow,
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
Including
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. For the variable display area, one display among a plurality of display results located within a predetermined range from the number of steps relative to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated A control pattern for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to a combination of the determination result of the pre-determining means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the result Including a selection means,
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control for deriving the display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection means includes
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed, at least one step number of the step numbers for a specific variable display region among the plurality of variable display regions Special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a special winning control pattern for specifying a specific display result,
The specific variable display when the pre-determining means determines that the generation of the first specific awarded prize accompanying the awarding of the game value of a predetermined size is permitted among the awarded prizes. A display result constituting the first specific prize winning is specified for the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range for the region, and the first specific prize winning is determined. The first specific grant that selects the first specific grant / control pattern that identifies the specific display result with respect to at least one of the number of steps different from the number of steps that identifies the display result that constitutes the display result Winning control pattern selection means,
The pre-determining means determines that the generation of the second specific award with the game value having the same size as the first specific award is permitted among the award winnings. Sometimes, the display result constituting the second specific prize winning is specified for the number of steps where the display result constituting the second specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range for the specific variable display area. The second specific award winning control pattern for specifying the specific display result with respect to at least one number of steps different from the number of steps specifying the display result constituting the second specific award winning. Second specific prize winning control pattern selection means for selecting
When it is determined by the pre-decision means that no winning is allowed, the display of the specific variable display area other than the specific display result from any of the number of steps. A non-winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a non-winning control pattern for specifying a result;
Including
In the display band constituting the specific variable display area, the display result constituting the first specific prize winning and the display result constituting the second specific prize winning are at intervals exceeding the predetermined range. Has been placed,
The first specific prize-winning control pattern includes the first specific prize-winning only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the second specific prize-winning is located within the predetermined range. The display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified for at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the second specific prize is located within the predetermined range. ,
In the second specific prize winning control pattern, the second specific prize winning control is performed only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. A display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified with respect to at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. ,
The special winning control pattern is the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific winning prize is positioned within the predetermined range, and the second specific winning prize control pattern specifies the specific display result The specific display result is specified for at least one of the number of steps to be performed, and the display result constituting the second specific award winning is the number of steps positioned within the predetermined range, and The slot machine characterized in that the first specific award winning control pattern specifies the specific display result with respect to at least one of the number of steps specifying the specific display result. A board case for housing the game control board;
A regulation member that is provided separately from the board case, and that prevents the connection between the connector on the game control board side and the wiring side connector housed in the board case in a state of being attached to the board case;
A connection means for connecting the main body of the slot machine and the substrate case so that the substrate case cannot be removed from the main body of the slot machine unless a predetermined removal restricting portion is destroyed,
By connecting the body of the substrate case and the slot machine by the connecting means, the regulating member removal restriction means for restricting removal of the restricting member from the board case is characterized in that it is configured, according to claim 1 or The slot machine according to claim 2 . A mounting portion provided at a peripheral position of the connector on the game control board side;
When attached to the attachment part, with a special member that makes separation from the attachment part impossible unless the predetermined separation restriction site is destroyed,
By attaching the special member to the mounting portion in a state where the connector on the wiring side is connected to the connector on the game control board side, a part of the special member is arranged at a position overlapping with the pulling direction of the connector on the wiring side is characterized by regulating the movement in the opening direction of the connector of the wiring side, the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3. The slot machine is
An informing means for informing information relating to the progress of the game;
The game control means has a storage area for storing data for performing operations so as to be readable and writable, and stores special decision data indicating that it is decided to allow the occurrence of the special prize, Data storage means for holding data stored in the storage area for a predetermined period even when power supply to the slot machine is stopped;
The game control means includes
Wherein the determined is that to allow the generation of said special pay by prior determination means, when said special pay did not occur, and carryover means carried over the decision to permit the occurrence of the special pay after the next game ,
Game control state return processing means for executing a game control state return process for returning the control state of the game control means based on data stored in the data storage means when the game control means is activated;
Special determination data determination means for determining whether or not the special determination data is stored when the control state of the game control means is returned by the game control state return processing means;
When the special determination data determination means determines that the special determination data is stored, the notification means at start-up performs control for notifying that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted, using the notification means. The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4 , further comprising: means. The slot machine has a storage area for storing data for allowing the game control means to perform operations in a readable and writable manner, and special determination data indicating that it is determined that the special winning is allowed to occur Data storage means for holding data stored in the storage area for a predetermined period even when power supply to the slot machine is stopped,
The game control means includes
A game control state return processing means for executing a game control state return process for returning the control state of the game control means based on data stored in the data storage means when the game control means is activated;
The slot machine initializes the data stored in the data storage means when the connection between the connector on the game control board side and the connector of the wiring is released while the power supply is stopped The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4 , further comprising a data initialization unit for power failure to be performed. The game control means includes advantageous state control means for controlling the gaming state to an advantageous state that is different from the special gaming state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the special gaming state ends.
The advantageous state control means ends the advantageous state when any one of the first specific prize and the second specific prize is generated. The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6 . In the advantageous state, when the pre-determining means allows the generation of either one of the first specific prize and the second specific prize, the generation of any prize is permitted. An allowable notification control means for performing an allowable notification control for notifying using a notification means or a notification means different from the notification means;
Permission information storage means for storing permission information indicating permission of the allowable notification control by the allowable notification control means according to establishment of a predetermined condition relating to the progress of the game,
The allowable paper known control means, on condition that the permission information is stored in the permission information storage unit, performs the allowable notification control,
The permission information storage means stores the permission information when the advantageous state is terminated by the occurrence of the first specific award or the second specific award when the permission information is stored. The slot machine according to claim 7 , wherein the memory is carried over to the next advantageous state.

Images